NIRMAL – HAND BOOK

HAND -BOOK

(A READY RECKONER)

for

ENGINEERS

Compiled by

Er. SHASHIKANT GAUR

 FOR INTROSPECTION

How to handle life! Reply came from my room-

1. Roof said : Aim high

2. Fan said : Be cool

3. Clock said : Value time

4. Calendar said : Be up to date

5. Mirror said : Observe yourself

6. Wall said : Share other’s load

7. Window said : Expand the vision

 This Nirmal Hand Book is dedicated to my

respected father Late Pt. Ishwar Singh Ji, who used to

Inspire, Guide and Direct me for hard work and dedicate

to your work.

He himself lived with a motto of

“SIMPLE LIVING

HIGH THINKING”

At present what I am is due to him. I will

always be grateful to him.

I am also grateful to Er. , for his precious time

devoted to editing and suggestions for this book.

Er. R.K. SHARMA

RULES FOR MEASUREMENT BOOK

1. This book as the basis of all accounts of quantities of work done
must contain such a complete record of facts as to be conclusive
evidence in a Court of Law. It should be most care-fully kept and
used for contract work, piece work, departmental work and for all
materials.
2. All measurements of contractor’s work, whether by regular or Petty
contract, or by Task work, should be entered in this book, as also the
measurements of all materials received.
3. In the case of large works, it will be found advisable to keep a
separate book for each work.
4. The measurements taken and recorded in this book, should be the
basis of the accounts and all quantities for each distinct item should
be clearly traceable to an abstract which is to be prepared in this
Measurement Book. This book should, when required, accompany
the bill to be checked.
5. The index at the beginning of the book, should be filled in as each set
of measurements are completed. This book, when filled is to be filled
in the office of the Director/ Head of the
Institute/Office/Laboratory.
6. Detailed measurement should be recorded only by officials In-charge
of works to whom measurement books have been supplied.
7. All measurements should be neatly recorded in the measurement
books and no where else. Erasures are strictly forbidden. When
measurements are cancelled the reason thereof should be recorded
over them by person concerned.
8. Each set of measurements should commence with entries stating in
the case of bills of work done:-
(a) The full name of the work as given in the estimate.
(b) The situation of the work.
(c) The name of Contractor or Agency.
(d) The number and date of his agreement.
(e) The date of completion as in agreement.
(f) Date of measurement.
(g) Date of actual completion of work.
9. In the case of the bills for supply of materials, information as at (c &
d ) and (e) above should be given together with the purpose of
supply in one of the three following forms:-
(a) Purchase for stock.
(b) “Purchases” for direct issue to the work of
________________________
(here enter the full name of the work as given in the estimate.)
(c) “Purchases for__________________(here enter the full name of
the work as given in the estimate) for issue to the
contractor_________________ on _____________________.
10. The person taking the measurements must sign his full signature
with date at the end of each day’s measurement.
11. In case of running accounts, a reference should be made to the last
set of measurement and where the job has been completed, the fact
should be recorded prominently. Similarly where measurements are
the first or the first and final, this nature should be recorded.
Similarly where measurements are the first or the first and final, this
fact should be noted.
12. No pages may be left blank or torn out, but where they have
inadvertently been left Blank, these should be cancelled by diagonal
lines and attested.

Form of Measurement Book

Particulars No L B H Contents

Mode of Measuring
Building works for preparing Estimates and making of Payments

1. In new masonry two-thirds the contents of all opening up to

springing with square
or segmental arch will be deducted.
2. In opening with semi-circular heads, the full quantity up to
springing will be deducted
3. All splayes will be calculated as squares.
4. All columns will be calculated as square of the diameter.
5. All projections for cornices will be calculated by the lineal meter.
6. Flued masonary in the floors will be measured as solid and half the
quantity allowed.
7. In repairs to masonry, the area will be calculated with out any
allowance being made for openings.
8. In plastering, white washing etc., no deduction will be made on
account of openings in door ways.
9. Plastering in cornices will not be separately measured.
10. In flat roofs, the dimensions of the terrace will be taken to 3” on each
side beyond the inner face of the parapet wall.
11. In sloped roof, the dimensions will be taken down to the eaves.
12. All timbers and scantlings will be calculated by the Cu.M. and all
planking by Sq.M.
13. Fitting and fixings includes all nails and hold fasts required but not
bolts, rods or straps.
14. In painting, the net measurements will be taken to the nearest mm.
In ventilators, doors & windows, 1½ times the superficial area will
 be allowed. In glazed doors, windows 2/3 rd , the superficial area will
be allowed.
15. Iron work will be paid in Kgs.
16. The normal units of measurement on the basis of which rates should
be calculated are as follows:
(a) Each work (excavation and filling) = per cum
(b) Brick work, concrete, stone work, road metal etc.= per cum
(c) Painting, plastering, pointing, white washing,
Distempering, flooring, roofing, ceiling etc. = per sqm
(d) Wood work, stone bed plates, dressed stone work,
mass RCC per cum
(e) Cornice skirting, surface, drain, down pipe guttering per R.M
(f) Iron and steel work and heavy castings = per Kg.
(g) RCC slab, R.B. Slab, thin walling and partition, window
Ventilator shutters etc = per sqm

MODE OF MEASURMENT OF PAINTING

DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
The work should be measured in Sq.m for actual work done,
including all soffits, Jambs, sills etc. and should be pieced per unit of Sqm.
Oil paint, French polish, Varnishing, Oiling, Cleaning and Wax Polish
should be measured in Sqm from outside of the framing as follows:
(1) Fully glazed partition, Windows, Ventilators, Doors = Sqm area of
one face only
(2) Half Paneled and half glazed = 1½ times
area of one face
(3) If fully paneled Twice the area of
one face
WATERING CURING
To be done at least 20 days and the concrete to be provided from
direct rays by spreading non-conducting materials over it.
 LABOUR

SAFETY

PROVISIONS

SCAFFOLDINGS
1. Suitable scaffols should be provided for workmen for all works that can not
safely be done from the ground or from solid construction except such
short period work as can can be done safely from ladders. When a ladder is
used, an extra mazdoor shall be engaged for holding the ladder and if the
ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable foot holds and hand
holds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall be given an
inclination not steeper than ¼ to 1 (1/4 is horizontal and 1 is vertical).
2. Scaffolding or staging more than 3.6 m (12 ft.) above the ground or floor,
swung or suspended from an over head support or erected with stationery
 support shall have a guard rail properly attached or bolted, braced and
otherwise secured at least 90 cm. (3 feet) high above the floor or platform of
such scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire length of the
outside and ends thereof with only such opening as may be necessary for
the delivery of materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened as
to prevent it from swaying from the building or structure.
1. Working platforms gangways and stairways should be so constructed that
they should not sag unduly or unequally, and if the height of the platform
or the gangway or the stairway is more than 3.6 m(12 feet) above ground
level or floor level, they should be closely boarded, should have adequate
width and should be suitably fastened as mentioned in 2 above
4. Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform shall be
provided with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by
providing suitable fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 90 cm.
(3 feet).
5. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other
working places. Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single
ladder shall be over 9 m. (30 feet) in length while the width between side
rails in rung ladder shall in no case be less than 29 cm. for ladder up to and
including 3 m (10 feet) in length. For long ladders this width should be
increased at least ¼” for each additional 30 cm. (1 ft.) of length. Uniform
step spacing shall not exceed 30 cm. Adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent danger from electrical equipments. No material on any of the sites
of the work shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or
inconvenience to any person or the public. The contractor shall provide all
necessary fencing and lights to protect the public from accident, and shall
be bound to bear the expenses of defence of every suit, action or other
proceeding at law that may be brought by an person for injury sustained
owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay any damages and cost
which may be awarded in any such suit, action or proceedings to any such
person or which may, with the consent of the contractor, be paid to
compensate any claim by any such person.
EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
All trenches, 1.2 mts. (4 feet) or more in depth, shall at all times be supplied
with at least one ladder for each 30 mt.(100 feet) in length or fraction there
of. Ladder shall be extended from bottom of the trench to at least 90 cm. (3
feet) above the surface of the ground. The side of the trenches, which are 1.5
m. (5 feet) or more in depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope and
securely held by timber bracing, so as to avoid the danger or sides to
collapsing. The excavated materials shall not be placed with in 1.5 m. (5
feet) of the edges of the trench or half of the depth of the trench which ever
is more. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. Under no circumstances
undermining or undercutting shall be done.
 DEMOLITION
Before any demolition work in commenced and also during the progress of
the work:-
1. All roads and open areas adjacent to the work site shall either be closed or
suitably protected.
2. No electric cable or apparatus which is likely to be a source of danger or a
cable or apparatus used by the operator shall remain electrically charged.
3. All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed
from risk or fire or explosion or flooding. No floor, roof or other part of the
building shall be overloaded with debris or materials as to render it unsafe.
All necessary personal safety equipments as considered adequate by the
Engineer-in-Charge should be kept available for the use of persons
employed on the site and maintained in all condition suitable for
immediate use, and the contractor should take adequate step to ensure
proper use of equipment by those concerned. The following safety
equipment shall be invariably provided.
Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement and lime mortars
shall be provided with protective footwear and protective goggles.
Those engaged in white washing and mixing or stacking of cement bags or
any materials which are injurious to the eye shall be provided with
protective goggles.
Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welders protective
eye shields.
Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective
clothing and seated at sufficiently safe interval.

CLEANING OF MANHOLES AND SEWER LINES

When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in active
use, the Contractors shall ensure that the manhole covers are opened and
ventilated at-least for an hour before the workers are allowed to get into the
manholes, and the manholes so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable
railing and provided with warning signals or boards to prevent accident
the public. In addition, the contractor shall ensure that the following safety
measures are adhered to:
a. Entry for workers into the line shall not be allowed except under
supervision of the JE or any other higher officer.
b. At least 5 to 6 manholes up stream and down stream, should be kept open
for at least 2 to 3 hours before any man is allowed to enter into the manhole
for working inside.
c. Before entry, presence of Toxic gases should be tested by inserting wet lead
acetate paper which changes colour in the presence of such gases and gives
indication of their presence.
d. Presence of Oxygen should be verified by lowering a detector lamp into the
manhole. In case, no oxygen is found inside the sewer line, workers should
be sent only with Oxygen kit.
e. Safety belt with rope, should be provided to the workers. While working
inside the manholes, such rope should be handled by two men standing out
side to enable him to be pulled out during emergency.
f. The area should be barricaded or cordoned of by suitable means to avoid
mishaps of any kind. Proper warning signs should be displayed for the
safety of the public when ever cleaning works are undertaken during day
or night.
g. No smoking or open flames shall be allowed near the blocked manhole
being cleaned.
h. The malba/rubble obtained on account of cleaning of blocked manholes
and sewer lines, should be immediately removed to avoid accidents on
account of slippery nature of the malba/rubble.
i. Workers should not be allowed to work inside the manhole continuously.
They should be given rest intermittently. The Engineer-in-charge may
decide the time up to which a worker may be allowed to work continuously
inside the manhole.
j. Gas masks with Oxygen Cylinder should be kept at site for use in
emergency.
k. Air-blowers should be used for flow of fresh air through the manholes.
When ever called for, portable air-blowers are recommended for ventilating
the manholes. The motors for these shall be vapour proof and of totally
enclosed type. Non sparking gas engines also could be used but they
should be placed at-least 2 meters away from the opening and on the
leeward side protected from wind so that they will not be a source of
friction on any inflammable gas that might be present.

l. The workers engaged for cleaning the manholes/sewers should be properly

trained before allowing to work in the manhole.
m. The workers shall be provided with Gumboots or non sparking shoes,
bump helmets and gloves, non sparking tools, safety lights and gas masks
and portable air blowers (when necessary). They must be supplied with
barrier cream for anointing the limbs before working inside the sewer lines.
n. Workmen descending a manhole shall try each ladder step or rung
carefully before putting his full weight on it to guard against insecure
fastening due to corrosion of the rung fixed to manhole wall.
o. If a man has received a physical injury, he should be brought out of the
sewer immediately and adequate medical aid should be provided to him.
p. The extent to which these precautions are to be taken depend on individual
situation but the decision of the Engineer-in-charge regarding the steps to
be taken in this regard in an individual case will be final.

---------------

PRECAUTIONS DURING PAINTING

The Contractor shall not employ men and women below the age of 18 years
on the work of painting with products containing lead in any form.
Wherever men above the age of 18 years are employed on the work of lead
painting the following precautions should be taken:
1. No paint containing lead or lead product shall be used except in the form of
paste or readymade paint.

2. Suitable face masks should be supplied for use by the workers when paint
is applied in the form of spray or a surface having lead paint is dry rubbed
and scrapped.
3. Overalls shall be supplied by the contractor to the workmen and adequate
facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to wash during
the cessation of work.
4. White lead, sulphate or lead work products containing those pigments shall
not be used in painting operation except in the form of paste or of paints
ready for use.
5. Measures shall be taken, whenever required in order to prevent danger
arising from the application of paint in the form of spray.
6. Measures shall be taken, whenever practicable to prevent danger arising
out of dust caused by dry rubbing down and scrapping.
7. Adequate facilities shall be provided to enable working painter to wash
during and or cessation of work.
8. Suitable arrangements shall be made to prevent clothing put off during
working hours being spoiled by painting materials.
9. Cases of lead poisoning and of suspected lead poisoning shall be notified
and shall be subsequently verified by a medical man appointed by the
competent authorities of the Consultant.
10. The Department may require when necessary a medical examination of
workers.
11. Instructions with regard to the special hygienic precautions to be taken in
the painting trade shall be distributed to working painters.

HOISTING MACHINERY
When the work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning, all
necessary equipments should be provided and kept ready for use and all
necessary steps taken for prompt resettle of any person in danger and
adequate provisions should be made for prompt first aid treatment of all
injuries likely to be obtained during the course of the work.

Use of hoisting machines and tackle including their attachment encourage

and supports shall confirm to the following standard of conditions.
a. These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound
material and adequate strength and free from patent, defects
and shall be kept required in good working order.
 b. Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as a
means of suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate
strength, and free from patent defects.
2. Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly
qualified and no person under the age of 21 years should be in-charge of
any hoisting machine including any scaffolding, winch or giving signals to
operator.
3. In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain ring hook, shackle
swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or as means of suspension the safe
working load shall be ascertained by adequate means. Every hoisting
machine and all gear referred to above shall be plainly marked with the
safe working load. In case of a hoisting machine having a variable safe
working load, each safe working load and the conditions under which it is
applicable shall be clearly indicated. No part of any machine or any gear
referred to above in this paragraph shall be loaded beyond the safe working
load except for the purpose of testing.
4. In case of Departmental machines, the safe working load shall be notified by
the Engineer-in-charge. As regards Contractor’s machines, the Contractor
shall notify the safe working load of the machine to the Engineer-in-charge
whenever he brings any machinery to site of work and get verified by the
Engineer-in-charge.
5. Motors gearing, transmission electric wiring and other dangerous parts of
hoisting appliances should be provide with efficient safeguard, hoisting
appliances should be provided with such means as will reduce to the
minimum the risk of accidental descent of the load. Adequate precautions
should be taken to reduce the minimum the risk of any part of a suspended
load becoming accidentally displaced. When workers are employed on
electrical installations, which are already energized, insulating mats, wearing
apparel, such as gloves sleeves and boots as may be necessary, be provided.
The worker should not wear any rings, watches and carry keys or other
materials, which are good conductors of electricity.
6. All scaffolds, ladders, and other safety devices mentioned or described
herein shall be maintained in safe condition and no scaffold ladder or
equipment shall be altered or removed while it is in use. Adequate washing
facilities should be provided at or near places of work.
7. These safety provisions should be brought to the notice of all concerned by
display on a notice board at a prominent place of work spot. The person
responsible for compliance of the safety codes, shall be named therein by the
contractor.
8. To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to
safety precautions, the arrangements made by the Contractor, shall be open
to inspection by the contractor or their representatives.
9. Notwithstanding the above clauses, there is nothing in these to exempt the
contractor from the operations of any other Act or Rule in force in the
Republic of India.

MODEL RULES FOR THE PROTECTION OF HEALTH

AND SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR WORKERS

1. APPLICATION
These rules shall apply to all buildings and construction works in which 20 (twenty) or
more workers arte ordinarily employed or are proposed to be employed in any day during
the period during which the contractor work is in progress.
2. DEFINITION
Work place means a place where twenty or more workers are ordinarily employed or are
proposed to be employed in connection with the construction work on any day during the
period during which the contractor work is in progress.
3. FIRST-AID FACILITIES
 At every place first aid facilities shall be provided and maintained, so as to b easily
accessible during working hours. First aid boxes at the rate of not less than one box per 150
contract labour or part thereof ordinarily employed.
3.1 The first aid box shall be distinctly marked with a red cross on white ground and shall
contain the following equipments:
(i) 5 small sterilized dressings
(ii) 3 medium size sterilized dressings
(iii) Large size sterilized dressing
(iv) 3 large sterilized burn dressing
(v) 1 (30ml) bottle containing a two percent alcoholic solution of iodine.
(vi) 1 (30ml) bottle containing salvolatile having the dose and mode of administration
indicated on the bottle.
(vii) 1 snake bite lancet
(viii) 1 (30gms) bottle of potassium permanganate crystals
(ix) 1 pair of scissors
(x) A copy of the first-aid leaf-let issued by the Director General, Factory Advise
Service & Labour Institutes, Government of India
(xi) 1 bottle containing 100 tablets (each of 5 gms) of aspirin
(xii) Ointment for burns
(xiii) A bottle of suitable surgical antiseptic solution
3.2.2 For work places in which the number of contract labour exceed 50. First-aid box shall
contain the following equipments:
(i) 12 small sterilized dressings
(ii) 6 medium size sterilized dressings
(iii) 6 Large size sterilized dressing
(iv) 6 large sterilized burn dressing
(v) 1 (60ml) bottle containing a two percent alcoholic solution of iodine.
(vi) 1 (60ml) bottle containing salvolatile having the dose and mode of administration
indicated on the bottle.
(vii) 1 roll of adhesive plaster
(vii) 1 snake bite lancet
(ix) 1 (30gms) bottle of potassium permanganate crystals
(x) 1 pair of scissors
(xi) A copy of the first-aid leaf-let issued by the Director General, Factory Advise
Service & Labour Institutes, Government of India
(xii) 1 bottle containing 100 tablets (each of 5 gms) of aspirin
 (xiii) Ointment for burns
(xiv) A bottle of suitable surgical antiseptic solution
3.3 Adequate arrangements shall be made for immediate recoupment of the equipment when
necessary.
3.4 Nothing except the prescribed contents shall be kept in the First-Aid boxes.
3.5 The First-Aid Box shall be kept in charge of a responsible person who shall always be
readily available during the working hours of the work place.
3.6 A person in charge of the First-Aid box shall be a person trained in First-Aid treatment, in
work in work places where the number of labour employed is more than 150.
3.7 In work places where the number of labour employed is 500 or more and hospital facilities
are not available within easy distance of the works, first-aid Posts shall be established and
run by a trained Compounder. The compounder shall be on duty and shall be available at
all hours when the workers are at work.
3.8 Where work places are situate in places, which are not towns or cities, a suitable motor
transport shall be kept readily available to carry injure person (s) suddenly taken ill, to the
nearest hospital.
4.0 DRINKING WATER
4.1 In every work place, there shall be provided an maintained at suitable places, easily
accessible to labour, a sufficient supply of cold water fit for drinking.
4.2 Where drinking water is obtained from an independent public water supply place shall be
provided with storage where drinking water shall be stored.
4.3 Every water supply of storage shall be at a distance not less than 50 feet from any latrines
drain or other source of pollution, where water has to be drain from an existing well which
is within such proximity of latrine or any other source of pollution, the well shall be
properly chlorinated before water is drawn from it for drinking. All such wells shall be
entirely closed and be provided with a trap door which shall be dust and water-proof.
4.4 A reliable pump shall be fitted to each covered well, a trap-door shall be locked and
opened only for cleaning or inspection which shall be done at least once a month.
5.0 WASHING FACILITIES
5.1 In every work place adequate and suitable facilities for washing shall be provided and
maintained for the use of labour employed by them.
5.2 Separate and adequate screening facilities shall be provided for the use of male and female
workers.
5.3 Such facilities shall be conveniently accessible and shall be kept clean and in hygienic
condition.
6.0 LATRINES AND URINALS
 Latrines shall be provide in every work place on the following scale namely:
a. Where females are employed, there shall be at least one latrine for every 25
females.
b. Where males are employed, there shall be at least one latrine for every 25 males.
Provided that where number of males and females exceed 100, it shall be sufficient if there
is one latrine for every 25 males or females as the case may be. One Latrine for the first 100,
and one for every 50 thereafter.
6.1 Every latrine shall be under cover and so partitioned off as to secure privacy, and shall
have a proper door and fastening.
6.2 Construction of latrines: The inside walls shall be constructed of masonary or some
suitable heat resisting non-absorbent materials and shall be washed inside and outside
once in a year. Latrine should not be standard lower than the bore-hole system.
6.3 a. Where workers of both sexes are employed, there shall be displayed outside each
block of latrine and urinal, a notice in the language understood by the majority of
the workers “For men only” or “For women only” as the case may be.
b. The notice shall also bear the figure of man or woman, as the case may be.
6.4 There shall be at least one urinal for male workers upto 50 and one for female workers upto
50 employed at a time. Provided that where the number of male or female workmen, as the
case may be, exceeds 500, it shall be sufficient if there is one urinal for every 50 males or
females upto the first 500 and one for every 100 or part thereof.
6.5 a. The latrines and urinals shall be adequately lighted and shall be maintained in a
clean and sanitary condition at all times.
b. Latrines and urinals other than those connected with a flush sewerage system shall
comply with the requirements of the Pubic Health Authorities.
6.6 Water shall be provided by means of a tap or otherwise so as to conveniently accessible in
or near the latrines and urinals.
6.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCRETA
Unless otherwise arranged for by the local authority arrangements for proper disposal of
excreta by incineration at the work places shall be made by means of a suitable incinerator.
Alternatively excreta may be disposed off by putting a layer of night soil at the bottom of a
pucca tank prepared for the purpose and covering it with a 15 cms layer of waste or for
refuse and then covering it with layer of earth for fortnight (when it will turn into manure).
6.8 The contractor shall, at his own expense, carry out all instructions issued by him by the
Engineer-in-Charge to effect proper disposal of night soil and other conservancy work in
respect of the Contractor’s workmen or employees on the site. The Contractor shall be
 responsible for payment of any charges which may be levied by Municipal or Cantonment
Authority for execution of such work on his behalf.
7.0 PROVISION OF SHELTER DURING REST
At every work place there shall be provided, free of cost four sheds, two each for males
and females fixed for rest separately for the use of men and women labour. The height of
each shelter shall not be less than 3 meters from the floor level to the lowest part of the
roof. These shall be kept clean and the space provided shall be on the basis of 0.6 sqm per
head.
Provided that the Engineer-in-Charge may permit, subject to his satisfaction, a portion of
the building under construction or other alternative accommodation to be used for the
purpose.
8.0 CRECHE
8.1 At every work place, at which 20 or more women workers are ordinarily employed, there
shall be provided two rooms of reasonable dimensions for the use of their children under
the age of six years. One room shall be used as a play room for the children and other as
their bedrooms.
The room shall be constructed on standard not lower than the following:
i. thatched roof
ii. mud floor and walls
iii. planks spread over the mud floor and covered with matting.
8.2 The rooms shall be provided with suitable and sufficient openings for light and
ventilation. There shall be adequate provision of sweepers to keep the places clean.
8.3 The Contractor shall supply adequate number of toys and games in the play room and
sufficient number of cots and leadings in the bed rooms.
8.4 The Contractor shall provide one Aya to look after the children in the crèche and the
number of woman workers does not exceed 50 and two when the number of women
workers exceeds 50.
8.5 The use of rooms earmarked as realize shall be restricted to children, their attendant and
the mother of the children.
9.0 CANTEEN
9.1 At every wok place where the work regarding the employment of labour is likely to
continue for six months and wherein contract labour numbering one hundred or more are
ordinarily employed, an adequate canteen shall be provided by the contractor for the use
of such labour.
9.2 The canteen shall be maintained by the Contractor in an efficient manner.
9.3 The canteen shall consist of at least a dining hall, store room, pantry and washing places
separately for workers and utensils.
9.4 The floor shall be mad of smooth and impervious materials and the walls shall be white
washed at least once a year.
Provided that the inside walls of the kitchen shall lime washed every four months.
9.5 The premises of the canteen shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition.
9.6 Waste water shall be carried away in suitable covered drains and shall not be allowed to
accumulate so as to cause a nuisance.
9.7 Suitable arrangements shall be made for the collection and disposal of garbage.
9.8 The dining hall shall accommodate at least 30 persons of the labour at working at a time.
9.9 The floor area of the dining hall, excluding the area occupied by the service counter and
any furniture except tables and chairs shall not be less than one square meter per dinner to
be accommodated.
9.10 a. A portion of the dining hall and service counter shall be partitioned off and
reserved for women workers in proportion to their numbers.
b. Washing places for women shall be separate and screened to secure privacy.
9.11 Sufficient tables, stools and chairs or benches shall be available for the number of diners to
be accommodated.
9.12 a. There shall b provided and maintained sufficient utensils, crockery, furniture and
any other equipment necessary for the efficient running of the canteen.
b. The furniture , utensils and other equipment shall be maintained in a clean and
hygienic condition.
9.13 a. Suitable clean clothes for the employees serving in the canteen shall be provided
and maintained.
b. A service counter, if provided, shall have top of the smooth and impervious
materials.
c. Suitable facilities including an adequate supply of hot water shall be provided for
the cleaning of utensils and equipments.
9.14 The food stuffs and other items to be served in the canteen shall be in conformity with the
normal habits of the labour.
9.15 The charge of the food stuffs, beverages and other items served in the canteen shall be
based on ‘No Profit, No Loss” basis and shall be conspicuously displayed in the canteen.
9.16 In arriving at the price of foods stuffs and other articles served in the canteen, the
following items shall not be taken into consideration as expenditure, namely:
a. Rent of the land/building.
 b. The depreciation and maintenance for the building and equipment provided for
the canteen
c. The cost of purpose, repair and replacement of equipment including furniture,
crockery cutlery and utensils.
d. The water and other charges incurred for lighting and ventilation.
e. The interest and amounts on the provision an maintenance and equipment
provided for in the canteen.
9.17 The accounts pertaining to the canteen shall be audited once every 12 months by registered
accountants and auditors.
10.0 ANTI MALARIAL PRECAUTIONS
The Contractor shall at his own expense, conform to all anti-malarial instructions given to
him by the Engineer-in-Charge including the filling up of any borrows, pits which may
have been dug by him.
11.0 AMENDMENTS
NBCC may from time to time, add to or amend rules and issue such directions as it may
consider necessary for the purpose of removing any difficulty which may arise in the
administrative thereof.

Weights and Measures

STANDARD METRIC COVERSION INTERNATIONAL PAPER SIZES

Inch X 25.4 A0 841 x 1189 33.1x46.8
Foot X 3048 A1 594 x 841 23.4x33.1
Yard X .9144 A2 420 x 594 16.5x23.4
Mile X 1.6093 A3 297 x 420 11.7x16.5
Acre X .9463 A4 210 x 297 8.3x11.7
Quart X .004 A5 148 x 210 5.8x8.3
Gallon X 28.3495 A6 105 x 148 4.1x5.8
Pounds X .4556 A7 74 x 105 2.9x4.1
Degrees/Fanrenheit X 5/9 -32
Millimeter X .0394 WIND SPEED
Metre X 3.2808 1 7mph Light wind
Metre X 1.0936 2 11mph Light breeze
Kilometre X .6214 3 16mph Gentle breeze
Hectare X 2.4710 4 20mph Moderate breeze
Litre X 1.0567 5 25mph Fresh breeze
Cubic Metre X 284.2 6 30mph Strong breeze
Gram X .0353 7 35mph Moderate gale
Kilogram X 2.2046 8 45mph Fresh gale
Degrees Celsius X 95/ + 32 9 50mph Strong gale
 10 60mph Whole gale
11 70mph Storm
12 80mph Huricane

HEIGHT AND WEIGHT COUNT

MEN WOMEN
HEIGHT WEIGHT HEIGHT WEIGHT HEIGHT WEIGHT HEIGHT WEIGHT
(cms) (kgs) (cms) (kgs) (cms) (kgs) (cms) (kgs)
157.5 53.5-57.5 178.0 66.2-72.5 147.5 43.5-48.5 167.5 54.4-61.2
160.0 54.8-60.3 180.0 65.0-74.8 150.0 44.4-49.9 170.0 56.2-63.0
162.5 56.2-61.6 183.5 69.8-77.1 152.5 45.8-51.2 172.5 58.0-64.8
165.0 57.8-63.0 185.5 71.6-79.3 155.0 47.1-52.6 175.0 59.8-66.6
167.5 59.0-64.8 188.0 73.4-81.6 157.5 48.5-53.9 178.0 61.6-68.4
170.0 60.7-66.6 190.5 75.7-83.9 160.0 49.9-55.3 180.0 63.5-70.3
172.5 62.6-68.9 193.0 78.0-86.1 162.5 51.2-57.1 183.0 65.3-72.1
175.0 64.4-70.7 196.0 80.3-88.4 165.0 52.6-58.9 185.5 63.1-73.9

CLOTHING SIZES
MEN’S SUITS AND OVERCOATS

American 36 38 40 42 44 46
British 36 38 40 42 44 46
European 46 48 51 54 56 59
Women’s Suits & Dresses
American 8 10 12 14 16 18
British 10 12 14 16 18 20
European 38 42 40 44 46 48
Shirts
American 14 14½ 15 15½ 16 16½ 17
British 14 14½ 15 15½ 16 16½ 17
European 36 37 38 39 41 42 43
Men’s Shoes
American 7½ 8 8½ 9½ 10½ 11½
British 7 7½ 8 9 10 11
European 40½ 41 42 43 44½ 46
Women’s Shoes
American 6 6½ 7 7½ 8 8½
British 4½ 5 5½ 6 6½ 7
European 37½ 38 39 39½ 40 40½
Children’s Shoes
American 4 6 8 10 12 14
British 43 48 55 58 60 62
European 109 122 140 147 152

TEMPERATURE TYRE ROMAN NUMERALS

PRESSURES
0
C F Lb/in2 Kg/cm2 II = 1 XVI = 16
-5 22 20 1.41 II = 2 XVII = 17
0 32 22 1.55 III = 3 XVIII = 18
5 41 24 1.69 IV = 4 XIX = 19
15 59 26 1.83 V = 5 XX = 20
20 68 28 1.97 VI = 6 XXX = 30
30 86 30 2.11 VII = 7 XL = 40
50 122 32 2.25 VIII = 8 L = 50
34 2.39 IX = 9 LX = 60
X = 10 LXX = 70
XI = 11 LXXX = 80
XII = 12 XC = 990
XIII = 13 C = 100
XIV = 14 D = 500

INFORMATION
Food category Measure Calories Food category Measure Calories
Fruits CEREALS
APPLE 1 SMALL 50-60 CORNFLAKES 1 cup 95
BANANA 1 MEDIUM 110-120 JOWAR 1 small 106
GRAPES 20 SMALL 50-60 WHEAT BREAD 1 slice 75
MANGO 1 SMALL 50-60 WHEAT CHAPATI 1 thin 40
ORANGE 1 SMALL 50-60 WHEAT PARATHA 1 256
STARCHY VEGETABLES MEAT/EGG/FISH
POTATO 1 MEDIUM 80 MUTTON 50 gms 150
DALS 1 LARGE 80 EGG(HEN) 2 pcs 100
KATORI
MIXED 120 GMS 80 FISH 50 gms 5
VEGETABLES
MILK & MILK PRODUCTS FISH (FRIED) 85 gms 140
CHEESE,SHETDAR 1 PIECE 111 BIRYANI/CURRY
CHEESE 1 TBLSN 28 BIRYANI (MUTTON) 1 CUP 225
COTTAGE
CREAM LIGHT 1 CUP 56 BIRYANI (VEG) 1 CUP 200
CURD BUFFALO’S 1 CUP 182 CURRY (CHICKEN) 100 GMS 225
MILK
MILK BUFFALO’S 1`CUP 206 CURRY (VEG) 100 GMS
MILK BUFFALO’S 1 CUP 78 PULLAV (VEG) 100 GMS
SKIMMED
MILK. 1 TBLSN 160 SWEET DISH
CONDENSED
MILK GOAT’S 1 CUP 70 CARROT (GAJAR 50gms
 HALWA)
BUTTER 1 TBLSN 62 JALEBI 50gms
GHEE 1 TBLSN. 150 KHEER 100gms
COOKED FOOD RASGULLA 150 GMS
BISCUIT (SWEET) 15 GMS ICE CREAM 1 helping
(VANILLA)
CAKE (PLAIN) 50 GMS 135
CAKE 50 GMS 225 BEVERAGES
(CHOCLATE)
DOSA (PLAIN) 1 MEDIUM 120 BEER 350 ml 150
DOSA (MASALA) 1 MEDIUM 250 COFFEE (COW’S 1 cup 60
MILK, SUGAR 2
TBLSN)
PAKORAS 50 GMS 175 COLA 300ml 135
PURI 1 LARGE 85 LEMONADE 1 glass 75
SAMOSA A PIECE 140 TEA (COW;S MILK, 1 cup 60
SUGAR 2 TBLSPN)
VADA (MEDU) 1 SMALL 70 WINE 100ml 85

CIVIL ENGINEERING
CONVERSION TABLE

1 KILLA = 8 KANALS 1 INCHES = 2.54 CM

1 KANAL = 20 MARLA 1 METER = 39.37 INCHES
1 KANAL = 605 Sq.YdS 1 METER = 3.28 FEET
1 MARLA = 30.25 Sq.YdS 1 METER = 1.09 YARD
1 HECTARE = 2.471 Acre 1 YARD = 3.00EET
1 ACRE = 0.4047 Hector 1 YARD = 0.9144 M
1 FURLONG = 0.2 KM
1 ACRE = 4840 Sq.YdS 1 FEET = 0.3048 m
1 ACRE = 4 Bigha 16 Biswas 1 MILE = 1.609 KM
1 ACRE = 96 BISWAS 1 Kilometer = 0.62 MILE
1 ACRE = 1 KILLA 1 sq. Kilometer = 0.386 sq.mile
1 sq.mile = 2.589 Sq.km2
1 Sq.mile = 640 Acres 1 sq feet = 0.0929 Sq.m
1 Sq.mile = 2.5899 Sq.km2
1 sq Yd = 0.8361 Sq.m
1 ACRE = 4046.856 Sq.km
1 sq Yd = 9 Sq.ft
1 Hectare =1000 sq.m
1 sq.cm = 0.155 Sq.ft
1 Sq.m = 1.9599 Sq.Yd 1 cubic inch = 16.4 cum
1 Sq.m =10.764 Sq.ft 1 cu foot = 0.0283 cum
1 BIGGA = 843.125 Sq.Yd 1 cu yard = 0.765 cum
1 CM =0.394 INCHES 1 cu foot = 1728 cu inch
1 Intl. Nautical Mile = 1.150779 Miles 1 cu yard = 0.76 cu m
1 gallon = 4.546 litters
1 Intl. Nautical Mile = 1.853 km

CONVERSION TABLE
British and American, Capacity measure
with metric equivalents
Linear measure British
1 inch = 25.4 1 fluid oz = 1.7339 = 0.0284 litre
millimeters cu.in.
exactly
1 foot = 12 inches = 0.3048 metre 1 gill = 5 fluid oz = 0.1421 litre
exactly
1 yard = 3 feet = 0.9144 metre 1 pint = 20 fluid oz = 0.568 litre
exactly = 34.68 cu.in
1 (satute) mile= 1,760 = 1.609 1 quart = 2 pints = 1.136 litres
yards kilometers
1 int.nautical mile = 1.852 1 galon = 4 quarts = 4.546 litres
kilometers
= 1.150779 miles Exactly 1 peck = 2 galons = 9.092 litres
Square measure 1 bushel = 4 pecks = 36.4 litres
1 Square inch = 6.45 American dry
sq.centimeters
1 Square foot = 144 = 9.29 1 pint =33.60 cu.in = 0.550 litre
sq.in. sq.dcimeters
1 Square yard = 9 sq.ft = 0.836 1 quart = 2 pints = 1.101 litres
sq.meter
1 acre = 4,840 sq.yd = 0.405 hectare 1 peck = 8 quarts = 8.81 litres
1 Square mile = 640 = 259 hectares 1 bushel = 4 pecks = 35.3 litres
acres
Cubic measure American liquid
1 cubic inch = 16.4 1 pint = 16 fluid oz = 0.473 litre
cu.centimeters = 28.88 cu.in
1 cubic foot = 1,728 = 0.0283 1 quart = 2 pints = 0.946 litre
cu.in. cu.meter
1 cubic yard = 27 cu.ft = 0.765 1 gallon = 4 quarts = 3.785 litres
cu.meter
Metric Equivalents in Millimetres of Fractions of an lnch

lnch 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/10 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8
mm. 1.587 3.175 4.762 6.350 7.937 9.525 11.112 12.70 14.29 15.87
inch 11/16 3/4 13/1 7/8 15/1 1
6 6
mm. 17.46 19.05 20.64 22.22 23.81 25.40

lnch 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10
mm. 0.254 0.508 0.762 1.016 1.270 1.524 1.778 2.032 2.286 2.540

TABLE OF REGULAR POLYGONS

Name of No. of Angle Area = R=Sx Side- R R= S x

Polygon sides Deg. S2x x Rx
Triangle 3 60o 0.433 0.577 1.732 3.464 0.289
Tetragon 4 90o 1.000 0.707 4.414 1.000 0.500
Pentagon 5 108o 1.721 0.851 1.176 1.454 0.688
Hexagon 6 120o 2.598 1.000 1.000 1.155 0.866
Octagon 8 135o 4.828 1.307 0.765 0.828 1.207
Decagon 10 144o 7.694 1.618 0.618 0.650 1.538
dodecagon 12 150o 11.196 1.932 0.517 0.543 1.866

Angle = angle contained between two sides; S = Side of pol;ygon ;

R= radius of circumscribed circle ; r = radius of inscriobed circle
Trapezium Area = sum of parrallet sides x height
 Engineering Information
GENERAL PROPERTIES OF METALS
Metal Weight (Av.) Ultimate Tensile Young’s Melting Point Deg
Strength Modulus
Tons/
Sq.in
C.ft C.cm Sq.in Sq.mm 0
F 0
C
Aluminium 165 2.64 5-9 7.9-14.2 4500 1220 630
Alumniun (cast) 160 2.56 6 9.5 -
Aluminium 170 2.72 12 18.9 -
(sheets)
Brass (cast) 510 8.15 8-16 12.6-25.2 - 1650 900
Brass (sheets) 510 8.15 13 20.5 -
Brass (wires) 510 8.15 19-22 30-34.6 6700
Bronze (cast) 550 8.80 16-20 25.2-31.5 6700 1750 950
Bronze (annealed) - 25-40 11.3-18.1 -
Cast iron, grey 440 7.00 8-14 12.6-22.0 6500 2200 1200
Cast iron, white 475 7.58 12-18 18.9-28.3 10200
Chromium 428 6.85 - - 3325 1830
Copper (bolts) 558 8.93 16 25.2 6700 1980 1083
Copper (cast) 550 8.80 9-11 14.2-17.3 - 1980 1083
Copper (sheets) 555 8.88 13-15 20.5-23.6 - -
Copper (wire) 555 8.88 20-27 31.5-42.3 8000 -
Copper (wrought) 558 8.93 15 23.63 - -
Gun Metal 540 8.64 13-10 20.5-29.5 5800 1820 995
Gun (cast) 540 8.64 18-22 28.3-4.6 -
Lead (cast) 707 11.30 0.81 1.23 - 620 326
Lead (pipes) 707 11.30 1.0 1.57 1000
Lead (sheets) 707 11.30 0.85 1.34 -
Manganese 500 8.90 31-55 - - 2275 1245
Monel Metal 554 8.85 38-45 48.8-86.6 11- 2475 1360
12000
Nickel 550 8.80 38-51 59.8-70.9 11-13500 2650 1450
Nickel iron 548 8.78 38-51 59.8-80.3 10250
Nickel silver 548 8.70 22-25 34.6-39.4 8000
Platinum 1342 21.47 118 195.85 - 3250 1785
Silver 855 10.48 18 28.3 5100 1795 980
Steel 490 7.84 28-33 40.1-52.0 13400 2400 1315
Tin 454 7.26 0.9- 1.4-4.3 3450 449 232
2.7
Tungsten 1180 18.88 - - - 0130 3387
Vanadium 345 5.52 - - - 3130 1720
Wrought Iron 480 7.68 20-25 31.5-39.4 12500 2750 1500
Zinc (cast) 428 6.85 2 3.15 - 786 419
Zinc (rolled) 446 7.15 8-11 12.8-17.3 5506 - -
Zinc (sheets) 448 7.17 8 12.6 - - -
CIVIL ENGINEERING
AREA
PLINTH AREA

Plinth area is the built up covered area of a building measured at floor level of any
storey. Plinth area is calculated by taking the external dimensions of the building
at the floor level excluding plinth off-sets, if any courtyard, open areas, balconies
cantilever projections are not included in the plinth area. Supported porches (other
than cantilevered) are included in the plinth area.
The following shall be included in the plinth area:
(i) All floors area of walls at the floor level excluding plinth of sets if
any.
(ii) Internal shafts for sanitary installations provided these do not exceed
2 sqm. in area air-condition ducts, lifts etc.
(iii) The area of barsaties and the area of mumty at terrace level.
(iv) Area of porches other than cantilevered.

The following shall not be included in the plinth area:

(i) Area of loft.
(ii) Internal sanitary shafts provided these are more than 2 sqm. In area.
(iii) In enclosed balconies.
(iv) Towers, sunshades, domes etc. projecting above the terrace level, not
forming a storey at the terrace level.
(v) Architectural bonds, cornices etc.
 (vi) Sunshades, vertical sun breakers of box Louvers projecting out.

FLOOR AREA

Floor area of a building is the total area of floor in-between wall and consists of
floor of all rooms, verandahs, passages, corridors, staircase room, entrance hall,
kitchen, stores, bath and latrines (WCs) etc. Sills of doors and openings are not
included in the floor area occupied by walls, pillars, plaster and other intermediate
supports are not included in the floor area. In short floor area is equal to plinth
area minus area occupied by walls, for deduction of wall area from plinth area to
obtain floor area.

The area shall be included:

(i) Door and other openings in the wall.
(ii) Intermediate pillars and supports
(iii) Plasters along wall excluding 300 sq.cm. in area.
(iv) Flues which are within walls but following shall be excluded from
the wall area.
a) Plasters along walls not exceeding 300 sq.cm. in area.
b) Fireplace projecting beyond the face of wall in Living room.
c) Chullah platform projecting from the face of walls in kitchen.
The floor of each storey and different types of floor should be measured and taken
separately. The floor area of basement, mezzanine, barsaties, mumties, porches
etc. should be measured separately.

CALCULATION AREA
Calculation area is the floor area of verandah, passages, corridors, balconies,
entrance hall, porches, staircase etc. which are used for movements of persons
using the building, the calculating area of any floor shall comprise of the
following:
a) Verandah and balconies. b) Passages and corridors. c) Entrance
hall.
d) Staircase and mumties. e) Shafts for lifts.

The calculation area may be divided into two parts:

(i) Horizontal Calculation area. (ii) Vertical Calculation area.

Horizontal Calculation Area

Horizontal calculation area of a building is the area of verandahs, passages,
corridors, balconies, porches etc. what are required for the horizontal movement
of the users of the building. This may be 10% to 15% of the plinth area of the
building.

Vertical Calculation Area

Vertical calculation area of a building is the area or space occupied by staircase,
lifts and the entrance hall adjacent to them which are required for the vertical
movement of the users of the building. This may be 4% to 5% of the plinth area of
the buildings.

CARPET AREA
Carpet area of building is the useful area or live able area or lettable area. This is
the total floor area minus the circulation area (Verandahs, corridors, passages,
lifts, entrance hall etc.) and many other non usable areas as bath, W.C., air
conditioning room, etc. For office building carpet area is the lettable area or usable
area, and for residential building, carpet area is the live able area and should
exclude the kitchen, pantry, stores and entrance to other rooms which are not used
for living purpose.

The carpet area of a building or any storey shall be the floor area excluding the
following:
a) Sanitary accommodation (bath & WC) g) Staircase and mumties
b) Verandah h) Shafts for lifts
c) Corridors and passages i) Barsaties
d) Kitchen and pantry j) Garages
e) Stores in domestic buildings k) Air conditioning ducts and
f) Entrance hall and porches air conditioning plant room.

The carpet area of an office building may be 60% to 75% of the plinth area of the
building with a target of 75%. The carpet area of residential building may be 50%
to 65% of the plinth area of building with a target of 65%.
For a framed structure, multi-storeyed building, the area occupied by walls may
be 5% to 10% of the plinth area(3% of external wall and 2% of internal walls) for
ordinary building with out the plinth area.
Note: The plinth area, floor area, circulation area, carpet area etc. should be
measured or taken separately of each story or floor.
Total covered area of all floor
Floor Area Ratio = Plot Area
 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATIONS
1. Reduction in strength of concrete made with stored cement.
Period of storage of cement (month) 0 3 6 12 24
Approx. relative strength at (28 days percent) 100 80 70 60 50
2. Removal of forms:
(a) Sides of foundations, Columns, Beams and Walls = 2 days
(b) Under sides of slabs up to 4.5m span = 7 days
(c) Under sides of slabs above 4.5m span and
Under sides of beams and arches up to 6 m = 14 days
(d) Under sides of beams and arches above 6 m
Span and up to 9 m span. = 21 days
(e) Under sides of beams and arches over 9 m span. = 28 days
Note: For rapid hardening cement 3/7 of the above period except the vertical
sides of slabs, beams etc. should be retained for at least 24 hrs. Cantilevers
should be provided with counteracting loads before removal of form work.
3. Approximate percentages of strength of ordinary Portland cement concrete at
different ages in comparison with the strength of 28 days.
Age in days & months: 1D 3D 7D 28D 3M 6M 12M
Strength in percent: 16 40 67 100 122 146 155
4. Relation between cube strength and water cement ratio by weight for fully
compacted concrete (Portland cement).
Water cement ratio by weight Cube crushing strength
(kg./sq.cm.)
7 days 28 days
i 0.35 400 530
ii 0.40 350 470
iii 0.45 300 420
 iv 0.50 250 370
v 0.55 220 320
vi 0.60 180 280
vii 0.65 150 250
viii 0.70 130 220
ix 0.75 110 200
x 0.80 105 180
# Volume of one bag of cement is 0.0347 cum.
# Measuring box to be used at site (size 35x25x40 cm.)
# Voids to be deducted from stack measurement of
(a) Stone metal 40 mm gauge and above = 7.5 %
(b) Soling stone/boulders 100 mm and above = 45 %
(c) Excavated rocks = 50 %

Miscellaneous Information
** Cement mortar should be used with in 30 minutes immediately after
addition of water. Mortar left unused for two hours should be rejected.
** Mixing time in mech.. mixture: (i) Concrete =2 min. (ii) Mortar =1 min.
** Tolerance on weight for round and square bars worked on the base 0.785
kg./sq.cm. of Cross sectional area per meter run.
Up to and including 8 mm: + 4 %. Over 8 mm: + 2.5 %
** Weather range for placing concrete = 4.5 degree C to 38 degree C
** Curing time for:
(a) Plain cement concrete =14 days.
(b) Reinforced cement concrete =10days.
(c ) Brick work & stone work =7 days.
(d) Flooring = 10 days.
(e) Plastering & Pointing = 7 days.
** Bond stone: At least one bond stone (for wall thickness 60 cm.) or set of
bond stones with overlap of 15 cm.(for wall thickness more than 60 cm.)
shall be provided for every0.5 sqm. of wall surface of stone masonry.
Co-efficient applied to the area measured flat and not grithed (for each side)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S.No Description of work Coefficient
Wood Work- doors, windows etc.
1. Panelled or framed and braced doors & windows 1.30
2. Ledged and battened or ledged, battened & braced doors & windows 1.30
3. Flush door etc. 1.20
4. Part paneled and part glazed doors, or gauzed doors & windows etc. 1.00
5. Fully glazed or gauzed doors & windows etc. 0.80
6. Fully venetioned or louvered doors & windows etc. 1.80
Note: Measured over all including chowkat or frame.
7. Trellis (or Jaffri) work one way or two ways. 2.00*
8. Carved or enriched work. 2.00
9. Weather boarding. 1.20
10. Wood shingle roofing. 1.10
11. Boarding with cover fillets and match boarding. 1.05
12. Tile and slate battening 0.80*
Steel Work- doors, windows etc.
13. Plain sheeted steel doors and windows. 1.10
14. Fully glazed or gauzed steel doors and windows. 0.50
15. Partially paneled and partially glazed or gauzed doors and windows. 0.80
16. Corrugated sheeted steel doors and windows. 1.25
17. Collapsible gates. 1.50*
18. Rolling shutters of interlocked laths (excluding top cover) 1.10
19. Corrugated iron sheeting on roofs. 1.14
20. A.C.corrugated sheets. 1.20
21. A.C. semi-corrugated sheets. 1.10
Note: * for painting all over.
STRENGTH REQUIREMENT OF CONCRETE
Concrete Equivalent compressive strength on 15 cm
Mix controlled concrete cubes minimum at
7 days 28 days
(kg./sq.cm.) (kg./sq.cm.)
1: 1:2 M 250 210 315
1:1/4:1/2 ------- 195 290
1:1 ½:3 M 200 175 265
1:1 ¾:3 ½. ------- 160 240
1: 2: 4 M 150 140 210
Note: 1. For plain CC six cubes for every 10 cum. of concrete, to be taken and
for less than 10 cum. No cube be taken.
2. For RCC, for every 45 cum. and part thereof the concrete laid, six
cubes to be taken ignoring any part less than 15 cum.
3. Minimum cylinder compressive strength (15 cm dia & 30 cm height
= 0.8 Compressive strength specified for 15 cm cubes.
4. Minimum compressive strength for 10 cm cubes = Compressive
strength on 15 cm Cube + 10 % (in case any compressive result is not
available).
5. The strength of any individual cube should not vary by more than 15
% of average strength of the set of three cubes tested.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SLUMPS TO BE ADOPTED
Nature of work Slump in mm
Vibrator used Vibrator not used
Plain Cement Concrete
Mass concrete in foundation, footings,
retaining walls and pavements 10-25 50-75
Thin sections of floorings less than 75 mm thickness 25-40 75-100
Under water concreting (actual slump to be decided -------- 100-180
by the Engineer-in-Charge).
Reinforced Cement Concrete
Mass concrete in RCC foundation, footings and
retaining walls. 10-25 80
Beams, slabs and columns simply reinforced 25-40 100-125
Thin RCC section or section with congested steel. 40-50 125-150

ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR STEEL CONFORMING

TO: IS. 226-1962, IS. 2062-1962, and ST. 44.0 of IS. 1977-1962 (Kg/Sq.cm.)

S. Form Thickness Axial Bend- Max Shear Av. Bear- Yield Equi-
No Or Tens- ing (in unstiff- ing guaran valent
diameter ion Pbc/ ened web) -teed
Pt. Pbt. Pq. Pq. Pb. Min.. Pe.
1. Rolled-beams and All 1500 1650 ---- ------ --- ----- 2285
channels
2. Plates, bars Up to and
universal beams including
and columns & 20mm 1500 1650 ---- ----- ---- ---- 2285
sections other than over 20mm
above. 1420 1575 ---- ----- ---- ----- 2205
3. Compound girders Up to and
composed of rolled including
beams or channels 20mm ---- 1650 ---- ----- --- ----- ----
with cover plates over 20mm
of thickness. ---- 1575 ---- ------ --- ----- ----
4. Plate girders with Up to and
single or multiple including
webs 20mm ---- 1575 ---- ------- ---- ----- -----
over 20mm
---- 1500 ---- -------- ---- ----- -----
5. Plates, sections and All ---- ---- 1100 ------- 1890 ----- ----
bars.
6. Rolled I-beams. All ----- ---- ---- 945 ---- ----- -----
7. Plate girders and Up to and
single channels including
20mm ---- ---- ---- 945 --- ---- ----
over 20mm
---- ---- ----- 865 --- ---- ----
8. (A)St.44.0 of IS-
1977-1962 plates,
sections & flats. 6mm &
above ---- ---- ----- ------- ---- 2600 ----
Bars(round, square 10mm &
& hexagonal) other above ---- ----- ----- ------ --- 2600 -----
 than rivet bars.

(B) IS.226-1962
IS.2062-1962

Plates, sections and

flats
6 mm and
Bars (round, Over & up
square and to 20 mm --- ---- ---- ------ ---- 2600 ----
hexagonal) other Over 20
than rivet bars mm & up
to 40 mm ---- ----- ----- ------ ---- 2400 ---
Over
40 mm. ---- ----- ---- ------ ---- 2300 ---
10 mm up
to 20 mm --- ---- ----- ------ ---- 2600 ----
Over
20 mm ---- ---- ----- ----- ---- 2400 ---

PERMISSIBLE DESIGN STRESS FOR CONCRETE (Kg./Sq.Cm.)

S. Grade Equivalent Comp. Strength Permissible Per. Stress Per. Stress in Per.
No Of Concrete at 28 days (min.) Stress in in shear or bond. Bearing
Concrete Mix Pre. Works Compression in tension pressure
Test Test in bending on full
Direct Bend Avrg. Local area(plain
cc only)
1. M 100 1:3:6 135 100 25 30 3 4 7 20
2. M 150 1:2:4 200 150 40 50 5 6 10 30
3. M 200 1;1 ½:3 260 200 50 70 7 8 13 40
4. M 250 1:1:2 320 250 60 85 8 9 15 50
5. M 300 -------- 380 300 80 100 9 10 17 60
6. M 350 -------- 440 350 90 115 10 11 18 70
7. M 400 --------- 500 400 100 130 11 12 19 80

WATER ASSESSMENT FOR BUILDING WORKS

Brick work, Masonary, Concrete = 2250 litres/Cum.
Plastering works = 85 litres/Sq.m
Pointing works = 60 litres/Sq.m
White washing per coat = 3 litres/Sq.m
Road work, Metalling or gravelling (6” thick) = 130 litres/Cum.

Field Test for Adulteration of Cement

(a) Burn a sample of cement for 20 minutes on a steel plate heated by a stove.
Adulterated sample changes colour while unadulterated sample remains
unchanged.
(b) Small blocks (say) 2”x2”x1/2” made out of adulterated cement can be
broken easily with pressure of fingers.
PERMISSIBLE DESIGN STRESSES IN STEEL REINFORCEMENT (Kg./Sq.cm.)
Type of stress Mild steel grade 1 Medium tensile Cold twisted
Steel steel
(IS: 432-1996) (IS; 432-1966) (IS: 1786-1966)
Tension other than in helical rein- Half the guaranteed
forcement in column or in shear yield stress, subject to 1900*
reinforcement up to 40 mm dia 1400 a maximum of 1900
---------- do -----over 40 mm dia 1300
Tension in helical reinforcement 1000 1300 1600
in column.

Tension in shear reinforcement 1400 1400 1400

in beams*.
Compression in column bars* 1400 1400 1400
Compression in bar in a beam or slab The calculated comp. stress in surrounding
when the comp. resistance of the concrete multiplied by the modular ratio
concrete is taken into account.
Compression in bars in a beam or slab Half the guarantee yield
when the comp. resistance of conc. is stress, subject to a
not accounted. Up to 40 mm dia 1400 maximum of 1900 1900
---- d0 ------- over 40 mm dia 1300 1900

Note: 1. Permissible stresses in Mild Steel Grade II= 90% of Permissible stress
in mild steel Grade I. If the design details have already been worked
out on basis of M.S. Grade I. Add 10% for mild steel grade II.
2. The yield stress of steels, for which there is no defined yield point,
should be taken to be 0.2% proof stress.
 PROPERTIES OF STEEL as per IS: 1786
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

S.N Chemical Unit Fe 415 Fe 500 F 550 Fe 500D

o Properties
1 Carbon % 0.300 0.300 max 0.300 0.250 max
2 Carbon % 0.420 max 0.420 max
equivalent
(C + Mn/6)
3 Sulphur % 0.060 0.055 max 0.055 0.040 max
4 Phosphorus % 0.060 0.055 max 0.050 0.040 max
5 S and P % 0.110 0.105 max 0.100 0.075 max

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

S.No Chemical Unit Fe 415 Fe 500 F 550 Fe 500D

Properties
1 Yield Stress (YS) N/mm2 415 min 500 min 550 min 500 min
2 Ultimate Tensile N/mm2 485 min 545 min 585 min 565 min
Strength (UTS)
3 UTS/YS Ratio 1.08 min 1.10 min
4 Elongation % 14.5 12 min 8.0 min 16 min
________________________________________________________________________
SIZE OF TIMBER FOR FORM WORK
________________________________________________________________________

Part of form work Timber Thickness of Size

Sheeting 25 to 50 mm
Beam and column sides 25 to 50 mm
Beam Bottoms 50 mm
Joists 50x100 mm to 75x200
mm
Ledgers 50x100 mm to 75x200
mm
Posts 75x100 mm to
150x150 mm
Column Yokes 50x100 mm to
100x100 mm
Struts and walings 50x100 mm to 15x
150 mm
TIMBER AND PLYWOOD REQUIREMENT FOR COLUMNS
Units are for foot (or) metre run of Column

Sr. Size of Column Backing Timber Plywood Remarks

No
Inches mm cu.ft/ft Cu./m Sq.ft/ft Sq.m/m
1 9x9 230x230 0.627 0.0583 3.575 1.090 3x2 inches
3/4” plywood
2 12x12 300x300 0669 0.0622 4.675 1.425 ,,
3 13x15 375x375 0711 0.0661 5.775 1.760 ,,
4 16x16 400x400 0724 0.0673 6.127 1.868 ,,
5 9x12 230x300 0648 0.0602 4.126 1.257 ,,
6 9x15 230x375 0669 0.0622 4.675 1.425 ,,
7 12x15 300x375 0690 0.0641 5.225 1.593 ,,
8 18x18 450x450 0881 0.0818 6.875 2.098 4x2 inches
¾” plywood
9 20x20 500x500 0919 0.0854 7.623 2.324 ,,
10 22x22 550x550 0956 0.0888 8.371 2.552 ,,
11 24x24 600x600 0992 0.0922 9.075 2.766 ,,
12 30x30 750x750 1103 0.1025 11.275 3.437 ,,
13 12x18 300x450 0825 0.0776 5.775 1.760 ,,
14 12x20 300x500 0844 0.0784 6.149 1.874 ,,
15 12x24 300x600 0881 0.0818 6.875 2.096 ,,
16 15x18 375x450 0853 0.0792 6.325 1.928 ,,
17 15x20 375x500 0872 0.0810 6.699 2.042 ,,
18 15x24 375x600 0909 0.0844 7.425 2.263 ,,
19 18x24 450x600 0936 0.0870 7.975 2.431 ,,
20 18x30 450x750 0992 0.0922 9.075 2.766 ,,
21 20x24 500x600 0955 0.0887 8.349 2.545 ,,
22 20x30 500x750 1011 0.0939 9.449 2.880 ,,
The above quantities are calculated using the following equations:
3’x2’ =- a2+b2 +1.625 = 0.367 cu.ft/ft
12
Timber quantity for 4’x2’ =- a2+b2 +1.625 = 0.367 cu.ft/ft
9
Plywood quantity for all = (a+b+0.126) x 2.2 sq.ft/ft
a2b2+lateral dimensions of the column in foot units
Note : Wastage included in the above table
 TIMBER AND PLYWOOD REQUIRMENT FOR BEAMS
Units are for foot (or) metre run of beam

Sr.N Beam/rib size Timber Plywood Bottom Sides

o
inches mm cu.ft/ft cu.m/m sq.ft/ft sq.m/m cu.m/m sq.ft/ft cu.m/m sq.ft/ft
1 9x12 230x300 0.736 0.0684 0.825 0.251 0.421 0.0391 2.75 0.838
2 9x15 230x375 0.736 0.0684 0.825 0.251 0.444 0.0412 3.30 1.006
3 9x16 230x400 0.736 0.0684 0.825 0.251 0.452 0.0420 3.48 1.061
4 9x18 230x450 0.736 0.0684 0.825 0.251 0.467 0.0434 3.85 1.174
5 12x12 300x300 0.736 0.0729 1.100 0.335 0.428 0.0398 2.75 0.838
6 12x15 300x375 0.785 0.0729 1.100 0.335 0.451 0.0419 3.30 1.006
7 12x16 300x400 0.785 0.0729 1.100 0.335 0.458 0.0425 3.48 1.061
8 12x18 300x450 0.785 0.0729 1.100 0.335 0.474 0.0440 3.85 1.174
9 15x16 375x375 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.457 0.0425 3.30 1.006
10 15x18 375x400 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.465 0.0432 3.48 1.061
11 15x18 375x450 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.480 0.0446 3.85 1.174
12 15x20 375x500 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.615 0.0571 4.22 1.286
13 15x24 375x600 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.656 0.0609 4.95 1.509
14 15x27 375x675 0.833 0.0774 1.375 0.419 0.686 0.0637 5.50 1.677
15 16x16 400x400 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.467 0.0434 3.48 1.061
16 16x18 400x450 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.482 0.0448 3.85 1.174
17 16x20 400x500 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.618 0.0574 4.22 1.286
18 16x24 400x600 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.658 0.0611 4.95 1.509
19 16x27 400x675 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.688 0.0639 5.50 1.677
20 16x30 400x750 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.719 0.0668 6.05 1.844
21 16x33 400x825 0.849 0.0789 1.463 0.446 0.750 0.0697 6.60 2.012
22 18x18 450x450 0.882 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.487 0.0452 3.85 1.174
23 18x20 450x500 0.882 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.622 0.0578 4.22 1.286
24 18x24 450x600 0.882 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.622 0.0615 4.95 1.509
25 18x27 450x675 0.882 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.693 0.0644 5.50 1.677
26 18x30 450x750 0.822 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.723 0.0672 6.05 1.844
27 18x33 450x825 0.882 0.0819 1.650 0.503 0.754 0.0700 6.60 2.012
28 20x27 500x675 0.915 0.0850 2.024 0.617 0.697 0.0647 5.50 1.677
29 20x30 500x750 0.915 0.0850 2.024 0.617 0.728 0.0676 6.05 1.844
30 20x33 500x825 0.915 0.0850 2.024 0.617 0.758 0.0704 6.60 2.012
 MANPOWER AND MINERALS REQUIREMENT IN RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS
Table: Equation for Materials Requirement (A is the plinth area in m2)
EQUATIONS

Material Single Storey Double Storey Four Storey

(R.C.C Framed)
Bricks (% Nos) 2.26A+66.8 2.15+63 -26.2+2.56A-0.0096A2
Cement (Tonne) 0.153AS+0.57 0.145A+0.54 0.0182A-0.35
Steel (Kg) 21.34A-314 21.97A-05 -1491+92.0A-0.366A2
Sand (m2) 0.47A-7 0.376A-5.6 0.361A-0.38
Course Aggregate
(i) 20mm and down (m2) 0.17A-0.21 0.178A-.021 0.295A-0.75
(ii) 40mm and down (m2) 0.145A+1.5 0.075A+0.78 0.45+0.002A
0.0001A2
Brick Aggregate (m2) 0.113A+.083 0.056A-0.42 0.21A+0.021
Timber frames and 0.019A+0.23 0.19A+0.23 0.02A+0.11
shutters (m2)
Timber Shuttering (m2) 0.0042A 0.0042A 0.009A-0.03
Ballies (m2) 0.504A 0.504A 0.90A-2.41
Lime (Quintal) 0.145A-0.35 0.723A-.017 0.063A-0.08
Surkhi (m2) 0.052A-0.37 0.026A-0.18 0.01A
Bitumen (Kg) 1.836 0.918A-4 0.357A+0.14
Glass(m2) 0.064A-0.73 0.064A-0.73 0.056A-0.06
Primer (Lt) 0.068A 0.068A 0.61A+0.56
Paint (Lt) 0.108A+0.27 0.108A+0.27 0.085A+1.93

Table: Equation for Labour Requirement (A is the plinth area in m2)

EQUATIONS

Labour Single Storey Double Storey Four Storey

(R.C.C Framed)
Mason (days) 1.335A+28 1.335A+26 1.67A-2
Carepentor (days) 1.184A-9 1.194A-9 1.61A
Painter (days) 0.089A 0.089A 0.09A
Blacksmith (days) 2.069A-4 0.274A+4 -16+1.01A-004A
Mazdoor (days) 4.769A+32 4.91A+33 5.49A-92
Equations for super-structure only. For sub-structure refer Table 3
POWER AND MATERIALS REQUIREMENT IN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Table 3: Equations for materials and labour requirements for substructure in Four
storeyed (R.C.C.Framed) Building
Materials/Labour Equations Materials/Labour Equations
Cement (Tonne) 0.02044A-.014 Ballies (m2) 0.03618A+0.06
Steel(m2) 0.036A LABOUR
Mason (days) 0.023A
Course Aggregate 0.071A-0.01 Carpenter (days) 00.05A
20 mm and down (m2)
Bitumen (Kg) -171+10.46A-0.041A Blacksmith (days) -1.6+0.1A-0.0003A
Shutter (m2) 0.0007A Mazdoor (days) 0.343A

Table 4 : Equations for Material and Labour Requirement for Additional one
Meter Depth of Foundations

Materials/Labour Equations Materials/Labour Equations

Cement (Tonne) 0.0022A+0.002 Timber-
Shuttering(m2) 0.002A
Steel(m2) 0.0031A+0.015A Ballies (m2) 0.018A+0.95
Course Aggregate 0.0053A+0.02 LABOUR
20 mm and down (m2) Mason (days) 0.006A
Bitumen (Kg) 0.0053A+0.02 Carpenter (days) 0.024A
Shutter (m2) 17.9+1.118A-0.004A Blacksmith (days) 0.006A
Mazdoor (days) 0.086A

Table 5: Actual consumption of Door and Window Fittings

Fittings Plinth Area in M Above
31-40 41-50 51-70 71-100 101-150 151-200 201
Hinges 100mm 12 18 24 30 37 46 55
75mm 26 36 42 58 62 75 88
50mm 12 18 22 28 38 53 60
Bolt 250mm 2 4 6 8 11 12 14
Latch 250mm 2 4 6 8
Bolt 250mm 6 8 10 12 14 23 35
150mm 14 20 24 30 38 45 60
100mm 6 8 9 13 17 20 23
Handles 100mm 8 12 16 20 25 32 37
Board Knob 2 2 2 4 4 4 5
Catcher 10mm 2 2 2 4 4 4 5
Blind Eyes 100mm 16 24 28 36 42 47 52
Band hooks 300mm 2 3 4 6 6 6 7
Band 115mm 1 1 1 2 3 4 4
Shackles
Light Catch 14mm 2 3 4 5 6 6 7

USEFUL NOTES ON CEMENT

1 Ton of Portland cement = 20 Bags

1 Cubic foot of Portland cement weighs 90 to 94 lbs., when filled. Average weight of
1:2:4 concrete coke breeze aggregate 100 lbs. per cubic foot: Clinker aggregate 110 lbs.
per cubic foot: Brick aggregate 125 lbs. per cubic foot: Ballast aggregate 145 lbs. per
cubic foot
Average weight of 1:2:4 reinforced concrete, 150 lbs per cubic foot.

1 Cubic feet of loose Portland cement paste will make about:

4.1 cu.ft of concrete mixed 1:2:4 5.8 cu.ft of concrete mixed 1:3:6
5.1 cu.ft of concrete mixed 1:2½:45 7.5 cu.ft of concrete mixed 1:4:8

1 Cubic foot of loose Portland cement neat as cement paste will cover about 9.5 sq.ft, 1
inch thick
1 Cubic foot of loose Portland cement to 2 of sand will cover about 16.8 sq.ft, 1 inch
thick

1 Cubic foot of loose Portland cement to 2 of sand will cover about 29. sq.ft, 1 inch thick

1 Cubic foot of loose Portland cement to 3 of sand will cover about 35.7 sq.ft, 1 inch
thick

Unreinforced Corrugated Asbestos Cement Shhets IS: 459-1962

Dimensions of corrugated sheets (Clause 4.1 & 6.1)

Pitch of Depth of Overal Effective Nominal Length of sheet

corrugation corrugation l width width thickness
P D B C T A
Mm mm mm Mm mm M
146 48 1050 1010 6 {.50,1.75,2.00,2.25,2.50,
146 48 1050 1010 7 2.75,3.00}

Dimensions of semi-corrugated sheets (clause 4.1 & 6.1)

338 45 1100 1014 6 {..do..}

338 45 1100 1014 7
 TASK OR PATTERN PER DAY PER SKILLED LABOUR

Particulars of item Quantity Per day

1 Brick work in lime or cement mortar in foundation and 1.25 cum Per mason
plinth
2 …do… in super structure 1.00 cum
3 Brick work in mud mortar in foundation and plinth 1.50 cum
4 …do… in super structure 1.25 cum
5 Half brick wall in partition 5.00 sqm
6 Coursed rubber stone masonary in lime or cement 0.80 cum
mortar including dressing
7 Random rubber stone masonary in lime or cement 1.00 cum
mortar
8 Ashiar masonaryt in lime or cement mortar 0.40 cum
9 Stone arch work 0.40 cum
10 Lime concrete in foundation or floor 8.50 cum
11 Lime concrete in roof terracing 6.00 cum
12 Cement concrete 1:2:4 5.00 cum
13 R.C.C. work 3.00 cum
14 12 mm plastering with cement or lime mortar 10.00 sqm
15 Pointing with cement or lime mortar 15.00 sqm
16 White washing or colour washing three coats 70.00 sqm Per white washer
17 White washing or colour washing one coat 200.00 sqm
18 Painting or varnishing door or window one coat 25.00 sqm
19 Painting large surface one coat 35.00 sqm Per painter
20 Distempering one coat 35.00 sqm
21 2.5 cm C.C.floor 7.50 sqm Per mason
22 Timber framing sal or teak wood 0.07 cum Per carpenter
23 ….do…. country wood 0.15 cum
24 Door or window shutters panels or glazing 0.70 sqm
25 …do… battened 0.80 cum
26 Single Allahabad titling or mangalore filling 6.00 sqm Per tile layer
27 Double Allahabad titling 4.00 sqm
28 Breaking of brick ballast – 40 mm 0.75 cum Per labourer
breaker
29 …do… 25 mm 0.55 cum
30 Breaking of stone ballast – 40 mm 0.40 cum
31 …do… 25 mm 0.25 cum
32 Earth work in excavation in ordinary soil 3.00 cum Per beldar
mazdoor
33 Earth work in excavation in hard soil 2.00 cum
34 Excavation in rock
35 Number of bricks laid by a mason in brick work upto a 600 bricks Per mason
height of 3 m.
36 Amount of work done by a mnazdoor (helper) per day
(i) Mix 3 cum mortar Per Mazdoor to a
(ii) Deliver mortar 4000 Nos distance of 15m
 (iii) Deliver mortar scaffolding cost for 5.5 cum per Mazdoor
Per mazdoor

RECOMMENDED MIXES FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

Depends on whether concrete is to be tamped, rodded or vibrated
And or absorption of water by aggregate
Nature of work Mixture Maximu Water in Best
recommen m sizxe of gallons per Consistency
ded aggregate bag of C
vol.proport to use
Long span R.C Arches High Load Column 1:1:2 ½” to ¾” 3.5 to 4.0 Medium

Heavily stressed members of structures, 1:2:2 ½” to ¾” 4.5 to 5.0 Medium or

small precast work such as Posts and poles soft
for Fencing, Telegraphs, Signals, Garden,
Furniture and decoratives and other work of
very high sections, watertight constructions
for high heads, long poles

R.C.columns and members subjected to 1:3:2 ¾” 5.5 Medium

medium loads, wall and floors of reservoir or
and tanks, cistersns, sewers, well kerbs and 1:2:2:4
platforms and other watertight constructions,
for moderate heads, non-suyrfaced roof
slabs, concrete deposited under water

General R.C.building work subjected to 1:2:4 ½” to 1½” 6.0 to 6½ Stiff for

ordinary stresses such as beams, slabs, as roads
columns, panel walls basement and required medium for
retaining, walls, stairs, lintels, sills, roads, others
pavements driveways, side walls, floors
steps, bunkers and silos, bridge construction
dams and piers etc., exposed to action of
water and frost, machine foundations
subjected to vibrations, R.C.footings,
R.C.piles.

Mass concrete work in culverts, retaining 1:3:5 1” to 2” 7.5 Stiff or

walls,m compound walls and ordinary medium
machine bases, foundation walls which need
not be water-tight

Mass concrete for heavy walls foundations 1:4:8 1½” to 1.00 to 10.5 Medium
under coloumn and under heavy duty floors, 2½”
concrete blocks, hollow block construction
(½” AGG)
MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR100 SQ.FT OF SURFACE WITH VARYING THICKNESS
OF CONCRETE
C= Cement Bags (Based on loose cement weighing 92 lbs/cu.ft)
F.A = Fine Aggregate (sand) in cu.ft
C.A = Coarse Aggregate (Broken Stone) in cu.ft
No allowance for wastage in the Table
Nominal Thickness
Mix Material 2” 2½” 3” 3½” 4” 4½” 5” 6” 8” 9” 10” 12”
C 3.8 48 57 67 78 86 96 115 153 172 191 229
1:1½:3 F.A 6.9 85 103 120 137 55 172 206 275 309 343 412
C.A 13.8 172 206 240 274 310 344 412 550 618 687 824
C 3.4 43 51 60 68 77 85 103 137 154 171 205
1:2:3 F.A 8.2 103 123 143 164 185 205 246 328 369 410 492
C.A 12.3 154 185 215 246 277 308 370 493 554 615 738
1:2:2:4 C 3.4 43 51 60 68 77 86 103 137 154 171 206
Or F.A 6.9 86 103 120 137 155 172 206 275 310 343 412
1:12/3:31/3 C.A 1.38 172 206 240 274 310 344 412 550 620 685 824

Nominal Material Thickness

2” 2½” 3” 3½” 4” 4½” 5” 6” 8” 9” 10” 12”
C 3.0 3.7 4.4 5.2 5.9 6.7 7.4 8.9 11.8 13.3 14.8 17.75
1:2:4 F.A 7.1 8.9 10.7 12.7 14.2 16.0 17.8 21.4 28.5 32.0 35.6 42.7
C.A 14.2 17.8 21.4 25.0 28.4 32.0 35.6 42.8 57.0 64.0 71.2 85.4

C 2.5 3.1 3.7 4.3 4.9 5.5 6.1 7.4 9.8 11.0 12.2 14.7
1:2½:3 F.A 7.3 9.2 11.0 12.8 14.7 16.5 18.3 22.0 29.4 33.0 36.7 44.0
C.A 14.6 18.4 22.0 25.6 29.4 33.0 36.6 44.0 58.8 66.0 73.4 88.0

C 2.2 2.8 3.3 3.9 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.7 8.0 10.0 11.2 13.25
1:3:5 F.A 8.3 10.4 12.4 14.5 16.5 18.6 20.7 24.8 3.1 37.2 41.4 49.6
C.A 13.8 17.2 20.6 24.1 27.5 31.0 34.4 41.0 55.0 62.0 68.8 82.6

C 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.2 4.7 5.2 6.3 8.3 9.4 11.4 12.5
1:3:6 F.A 7.5 9.4 11.2 13.1 14.9 16.8 18.7 22.4 29.9 33.6 37.4 44.9
C.A 15.0 18.8 22.4 26.2 29.8 33.6 33.4 44.8 59.8 67.2 74.8 89.8

C 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 36 4.0 4.8 6.4 7.2 8.0 9.6
1:4:8 F.A 7.7 9.6 11.5 13.5 15.4 17.3 19.2 23.0 30.7 34.6 38.4 46.1
C.A 15.4 19.2 23.0 27.0 30.8 34.6 38.4 46.0 61.4 69.2 76.8 92.2
 ESTIMATING QUANTITIES
Quantities of Cement, Fine Aggregate and Coarse Aggregate required for
100 cu.feet Compact Mortar or Concrete.1
Assumption-Voids in sand 40% broken sone 45% specific gravity of Cement = 3.1
Nominal (by Water in Cement Sand Sand Coarse
mix weight) Cement bags dry (bulking) moist Sand
Cement for ratio Cu.ft 20% (broken
Fine minimum Gallons Cu.ft stone)
Aggregate per bag Cu.ft
Coarse Aggregate consistency
1 1 “ .25 2.8 07.5 69.0 82.8 “
1 1½ “ .28 3.1 46.5 84.0 101.0 “
1 2 “ .30 3.3 39.5 94.0 113.0 “
1 2½ “ .35 3.9 53.5 100.0 120.0 “
1 3 “ .40 4.4 29.0 105.0 126.0 “
1 4 “ .53 5.9 22.8 110.0 132.0 “
1 6 “ .70 7.8 16.3 118.0 142.0 “
1 8 “ .09 10.0 12.7 122.0 147.0 “
1 1 2 .30 3.3 31.9 38.4 46.1 76.4
1 1½ 3 .42 4.7 22.9 41.2 49.5 82.4
1 1 2/3
3 .48 5.3 20.6 41.2 49.5 82.4
1 2 2 .42 4.7 24.5 59.0 70.8 59.0
1 2 3 .50 5.5 20.5 49.2 59.0 73.8
1 2 3½ .53 5.9 19.0 46.1 55.5 79.8
1 2 4 .55 6.1 17.75 42.7 51.2 85.4
1 2¼ 3½ .55 6.1 18.25 49.3 59.2 76.7
1 2½ 3½ .57 6.3 17.55 52.6 63.1 73.8
1 2½ 4 .60 6.6 16.5 49.5 59.5 79.2
1 2½ 5 .65 7.2 14.7 44.0 52.9 88.0
1 3 4 .65 7.2 15.35 55.2 66.2 73.8
1 3 5 .69 7.7 13.35 49.6 59.5 82.6
1 3 6 .75 8.3 12.5 44.9 53.9 89.8
1 4 8 .95 10.5 9.6 46.1 55.5 92.2
1. Also known 1:2:2:4 1. for gravel aggregate decrease cement by 5%
No allowance made in table fine aggregate by 2 cu.ft and coarse aggregate
for wastage in proportion to fine aggregate as gives in the
mix

LOADS
 Structures are designed for the worst combination of dead and live loads wherever
applicable, wind loads, seismic forces and secondary effects such as shrinkage, the rise or
fall in temperature etc. must also be considered
Dead Loads
The dead weight of a number fo materials and the structural item is given in Table
No.1 in using the figures it should be noted that the density of most materials varies
within certain well defined limits and this variation can, therefore, affect he imposed
loading. The figure in the table are however sufficiently accurate for normal design
purpose.
The live load to be used for the design of floors and roofs in building are given in
Table 2&3 respectively. They are considered as uniformly distributed static loads on the
plain area and include the effect of normal impart. They however, do not take into
consideration special concentrated loads nor do they cater for loads incidental to
construction and special cases of vibration such as moving machinery, heavy acceleration
from cranes, hoists and the like such loads should be dealt with individually in each case.
The figure given in Table 2&3 are conversion from the loading specified in the
Indian Standard of Practice No 875-1957, and their application should therefore be read in
conjunction with the provisions of this code.
Wind Pressure
The basic pressure induced by wind loads for various heights of exposed surface
are given in table No.4. The figures are based on Table III of the I.S Code of Practice No
875-1957 and their application should confirm to the provisions contained in clause 4 of
the code.
Earth Pressure
The value of the horizontal pressure exerted by a retained material is obtained
from the normal Rankin’s formula, which for a level fill retained against a vertical surface
is expressed as:
Pressure with
Where P = the pressure in Kg/m2
W = the unit weight of earth in Kgs/m2
H = the height of fill in matter
O = the angle of repose of the fill in degrees
The unit weight of earth and the anbgle ofd repose will of course vary depending
upon the degree of saturation of the retained material.
The pressure exerted on inclined surfaces and due to the effect ofstoping files are
also derived from the normal formulae, for which reference may be made to text book on
the subject.
Seismic Effects
The forces exerted as a result of seismic effect can be calculated directly from the
formulae given in clause 7 of the I.S.Code oif Practice No. 875-1957.

LIVE LOADS ON FLOORS

Alternative minimum live load
Loading Type of floor Minimu For Slabs For Beams
Class m load uniformly uniformly
No per unit distributed distributed
area over Span over Span
(Kg/m3) per metre (Kg)
width (Kg)
195a Floor for residential purpose, including 195 474 1161
dwelling houses
195b Floors of tenements, hospital wards, bed 1954 474 1162
rooms and private sitting rooms in hostels
and dormitories
244 Office floors other than entrance halls, floors 244-390 593-949 1451-2232
of light work rooms
293 Floors of banking halls, office entrance halls 293 711 1742
and office floors below entrance halls and
reading rooms
390 Shop floors used for the display and scale of 390 949 2322
merchandising. Work rooms, generally floor
of class rooms, in schools, garages, for
vehicles not exceeding 2.54 tonnes gross
weight, palces of assembly with fixed seating,
churches, chapels, restaurants, circulation
space in machinery halls, power stations etc.,
where not occupied by plant or equipment
488 Floors of warehouses, workshops, factories 488 1186 2903
and other buildings or parts of building of
similar category for light weight loads, office
floors, for storages and filling purposes,
places oif assembly without fixed seating
(Public rooms in hotels, dances halls, waiting
halls, etc.)
732 Floors of warehouses, workshops, factories 732 For garage floors only 1.5
and other building or parts of building of times the maximum
similar category for medium weight loads, wheel load, but not less
floors of garages for vehicles not exceeding than 907 Kg, considered
4.064 tonnes gross weight tobe distributed over a
floor area of 0.760 m.
square
976 Floor of warehouses, workshop, factories and 976
other similar building of similar category for
heavy, weighted loads, floors of book stores,
roofs and pavements lights over basements
projecting under the public footpath.
Stairs, corridors, landings and balconies not
liable to overcrowding.
For class 195a loading 195
For class 195b loading 293
For all classes 488
Balconies liable to overcrowding 488
LIVE LOADS ON ROOFS

Type Slope of Roof and snow Imposed loads other than wind Snow load
Roofs Flat, sloping or curved 147 Kg/m2 measured on plan subject Where snow in
other with stop upto and to a minimum of 91 Kg uniformly encountered
than including 100 distributed over any span of 0.305 m additional
sheeted width of the roof slab and 726 Kgs allowance of 15
roofs uniformly distributed over this span Kg per metre
in the case of all beams depth of snow
measured on
plan
Sloping or curved roofs 73 Kg/m3 measured onplan or 91 Kg …do..
from 100 to 300 and concentrated load
including 300 Nil ..do..
Sloping or curved roofs
greater than 300
Sheeted Flat, sloping or curved To provide for loads incidental tio
maintenance all roof coverings (other
than glass) and supporting structure ..do..
shall be capable of carrying a load of
82 Kg concentrated on an area 12.7 cm
square. This load is not in addition to
wind load and shall be treated as an
occassional

DEAD WEIGHT OF MATERIALS

Item Weight item Weight
Bituminous Substances
Anthracite coal 1500 Kg/m3 Graphite 500 Kg/m3
Peet 750 Kg/m3 Crude oil 880 Kg/m3
Heavy Charcoal 530 Kg/m3 Pitch 1100 Kg/m3
Coke 1200 Kg/m3 Coal tar 1200 Kg/m3

Excavated Materials
Clay (dry) 1600 Kg/m3 Earth (packed) 1520 Kg/m3
Clay (damp, plastic) 1760 Kg/m3 Sand (dry,loose) 1440-1700 Kg/m3
Earth (dry,loose) 1200 Kg/m3 Sand (dry,packed) 1600-1900 Kg/m3

Liquids
Alcohol 780 Kg/m3 Sulphuric acid 1800 Kg/m3
Gasoline 670 Kg/m3 Vegetable oil 930 Kg/m3
Ice 910 Kg/m3 water 1000 Kg/m3
Nitric Acid 1500 Kg/m3

Building Materials
Brick 1600 Kg/m3 Limestone 2560 Kg/m3
Cement 14400 Kg/m3 Sandstone 2800 Kg/m3
Chalk 2200 Kg/m3 Steel 7800 Kg/m3
Glass 2560 Kg/m3 Timber 750-720 Kg/m3
Structural items, Ceilings,
Finishes, etc.
A.C.Sheets 17 Kg/m2 Concrete 2306 Kg/m3
Brick masonary 1920 Kg/m2 G.I.Sheet, 24 gauge 5 Kg/m3
Brick wall, 6 in thick 295 Kg/m2 G.I.Sheet, 16 gauge 10 Kg/m3
Brick wall 9 in thick 440 Kg/m2 Mangalore tiles with 69 Kg/m3
battens

Cement plaster 2.5 44 Kg/m2 Rubble masonary 2100 Kg/m3

cm thick

MECHANICAL
Properties of Various Metals and Alloys

Materials Relative Temp. Coeff of Specific Thermal Average Melting

resistance Resistivity gravity conductivity thermal point
W/cm/K Expan.. O0C
X0.60C
Aluminium 1.64 0.0039 2.70 2.03 28.7 660
Brass (66 Cu34Zn) 3.9 0.002 8.47 1.2 20.2 920
Copper annealed 1.00 0.00393 8.89 3.88 16.1 1083
Hard drawn 1.03 0.00382 8.94 1083
Iron pure 5.6 0.552-0.0062 7.86 0.67 12.1 1535
Lead 12.78 0.0039 11.34 0.344 29.4 327
Magnesium 2.67 0.004 17.4 1.58 29.8 661
Nickel 5.05 0.0047 8.9 0.6 15.5 1435
Silicon 2.4 0.020 46.8 1420
Silver 0.95 0.0038 10.5 4.19 18.8 960.5
Steel manganese 913mm 41.1 7.81 0.113 1510
IC 86 Fe.)
Steel SAE: 1045 7.6-12.7 7.8 0.59 15.0 1480
(0.40.5C balance Fe)
Tin 6.7 0.0042 7.3 0.64 26.9 231.9
Zinc 3.4 0.0037 7.14 1.12 26.3 419

Flat Iron – Weight in Kg. Per Metre

0.7843 Kg/cm2 per metre or 1 cft. Of steel 490 lbs.

Thickness 5 5.5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 16
& width
in mm
12 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5
16 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.0
20 0.8 0.9 0.0 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.5
25 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.1
32 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.0
40 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.5 3.1 3.5 3.8 4.4 5.0
50 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.1 3.9 4.3 4.7 5.5 6.3

WEIGHTOF MATERIALS
d Round Square Hexagonal Octagonal d Round Square Hexagonal Octagonal
mm mm
5 0.154 0.196 0.170 0.163 53 17.319 22.051 19.098 18.267
6 0.222 0.283 0.245 0.234 54 17.978 22.891 19.824 18.963
7 0.302 0.385 0.336 0.319 55 18.650 23.746 20.865 19.672
8 0.395 0.502 0.435 0.416 56 19.335 24.618 21.319 20.394
9 0.499 0.636 0.651 0.527 57 20.031 25.505 22.088 21.129
10 0.617 0.785 0.680 0.650 58 20.740 26.407 22.869 21.877
11 0.746 0.950 0.823 0.787 59 21.462 27.326 23.665 22.638
12 0.888 1.130 0.979 0.936 60 22.195 28.260 24.474 23.412
13 1.042 1.327 1.14 1.09 61 22.941 29.210 25.296 24.198
14 1.208 1.539 1.330 1.275 62 23.700 30.175 26.133 24.998
15 1.387 1.766 1.530 1.463 63 24.470 31.157 26.952 25.811
16 1.578 2.010 1.740 1.665 64 25.253 32.154 27.846 26.637
17 1.782 2.269 1.965 1.879 65 26.05 33.17 28.72 27.48
18 1.998 2.543 2.203 2.107 66 26.86 34.20 29.61 28.33
19 2.226 2.834 2.454 2.348 67 27.68 35.24 30.52 29.19
20 2.466 2.140 2.719 2.601 68 28.61 36.30 31.44 30.07
21 2.719 3.462 2.998 2.868 69 29.35 37.37 32.37 30.96
22 2.984 3.799 3.290 3.148 70 30.21 38.46 33.31 31.87
23 3.261 4.153 3.596 3.440 71 31.08 39.57 34.27 32.78
24 3.551 4.522 3.916 3.746 72 31.96 40.69 35.24 33.71
25 3.853 4.906 4.249 4.065 73 32.86 41.83 36.23 34.66
26 4.163 5.307 4.596 4.396 74 33.76 42.99 37.23 35.61
27 4.495 5.723 4.958 4.741 75 34.68 44.16 38.24 36.58
28 4.84 6.154 5.330 5.299 76 35.61 45.34 39.27 37.56
29 5.18 6.602 5.717 5.469 77 36.56 46.54 40.31 38.56
30 5.49 7.085 6.118 5.853 78 37.51 47.76 41.36 39.56
31 5.925 7.544 6.503 6.250 79 38.48 48.99 42.43 40.59
32 6.313 8.038 9.961 6.659 80 39.49 50.24 43.51 41.62
33 6.714 8.549 7.403 7.082 81 40.45 51.50 44.60 42.67
34 7.127 9.075 7.859 7.518 82 41.45 52.78 45.71 43.73
35 7.553 9.616 8.328 7.966 83 42.47 54.08 46.83 44.80
36 7.990 10.220 8.811 8.428 84 43.50 55.39 47.97 45.89
37 8.440 10.747 9.307 8.903 85 44.55 56.72 49.12 46.99
38 8.903 11.225 9.817 9.391 86 45.60 58.06 50.28 48.10
39 9.378 11.940 10.340 9.891 87 46.67 59.42 51.46 49.22
40 9.865 12.560 10.877 10.405 88 47.75 60.79 52.65 50.36
41 10.364 13.196 11.428 10.932 89 48.84 62.18 53.85 51.51
42 10.876 13.847 11.992 11.472 90 49.94 63.58 55.07 52.68
43 11.400 14.515 12.570 12.024 91 51.06 65.01 56.30 53.85
44 11.936 15.198 13.162 12.590 92 52.18 66.44 57.54 55.04
45 12.485 15.896 13.767 13.196 93 53.32 67.90 58.80 56.25
46 13.046 16.611 13.385 13.761 94 54.48 69.36 60.07 57.46
47 13.619 17.341 15.017 14.366 95 55.64 70.85 61.36 58.69
48 14.205 18.086 15.663 14.983 96 56.82 72.35 62.65 59.93
49 14.803 18.848 16.323 15.614 97 58.01 73.86 63.96 61.19
50 15.414 19.625 16.996 16.258 98 59.21 75.39 65.29 62.46
51 16.036 20.418 17.682 16.915 99 60.43 76.94 66.63 63.74
52 16.617 21.226 18.383 17.585 100 61.65 78.50 67.98 65.08

WEIGHTS OF STEEL AND CAST IRON

READY METHODS OF CALCULATING

Steel Cubic meteres X .2833 =Lbs

,, ,, X 0.00253 =Cwts
,, ,, X 400+1/100 =Cwts
Cast Iron Cubic inches X .263 =Lbs
,, ,, X .00253 =Cwts
 ,, ,, X 7+300 =Cwts
Squares
Steel Side2 x length + 4+1/10 and ½ for the tenth =Lbs
,, Side2 x length + 400+1/1000 =Cwts
Cast Iron Side2 x 3 length + 10 – 1/5 =Lbs
,, Side2 x 2 length + 1/10 +10 =Cwts
Rounds
Steel Dia2 x 2 length + 9 =Lbs
,, Dia2 x 2 length + 1000 =Cwts
Cast Iron Dia2 x length + 10 -½ =Lbs
,, Dia2 x length 9 + 6+10 =Cwts
Flats
Steel Width x thickness x length + 4+1/10 and 1/3 of the tenth =Lbs
,, Width x thickness x length + 400 +1/100 =Cwts
Cast Iron Width x thickness x 3 length + 10 – 1/3 =Lbs
,, Width x thickness x 2 length + 1/6 + 1000 =Cwts
Rings or cylinders
Steel Inside dia + thickness x thickness x 8 length +9 =Lbs
,, Inside dia + thickness x thickness x 8 length x1000 =Cwts
Cast Iron Inside dia + thickness x thickness x 4 length x .206 =Lbs
,, Inside dia + thickness x thickness x 8 length x 1100 =Cwts
Hesagons
Steel Dia2 x length x .249 =Lbs
,, Dia2 x length x .00222 =Cwts
Cast Iron Dia2 x length x .227 =Lbs
,, Dia2 x length x .00202 =Cwts
Octagons `
Steel Dia2 x length x .235 =Lbs
,, Dia2 x length x .0021 =Cwts
Cast Iron Dia2 x length x .217 =Lbs
,, Dia2 x length x .00194 =Cwts

STRUCTURAL
Square and Round Bars
diameter Weight per meter Sectional Perimeter Length per Ton
W S .
Kg Kg cm2 cm2 Cm2 cm2
5.0 0.20 0.15 0.25 0.20 2.0 1.57 5000 6667
5.5 0.24 0.19 0.30 0.24 2.2 1.73 4167 5263
6.0 0.28 0.22 0.36 0.28 2.4 1.88 3571 4545
7.0 0.38 0.30 0.49 0.38 2.8 2.20 2632 3333
8.0 0.50 0.39 0.64 0.50 3.2 2.51 2000 2564
9.0 0.64 0.50 0.81 0.64 3.6 2.83 1563 2000
10.0 0.78 0.62 1.00 0.79 4.0 3.14 1282 1613
11 0.95 0.75 1.21 0.95 4.4 3.46 1053 1333
12 1.13 0.89 1.44 1.13 4.8 3.77 885 1124
14 1.54 1.21 1.96 1.54 5.6 4.40 449 826
16 2.01 1.58 2.59 2.01 6.4 5.03 498 633
18 2.54 2.00 3.24 2.54 7.2 5.65 394 500
20 3.14 2.47 4.00 3.14 8.0 6.28 3.19 405
22 3.80 2.98 4.84 3.80 8.8 6.91 263 336
25 4.91 3.85 6.25 4.91 10.0 7.85 204 260
28 6.15 4.63 7.84 6.16 11.2 8.80 163 207
32 8.04 6.31 10.24 8.04 12.8 10.05 124 159
36 10.17 7.99 12.96 10.18 14.4 11.31 98 125
40 12.56 9.86 16.00 12.57 16.0 12.57 80 101
45 15.90 12.49 20.25 15.90 18.0 14.14 63 80
50 19.62 15.41 25.00 19.64 20.0 15.71 51 65
56 24.62 19.34 31.36 24.63 22.4 17.69 41 52
63 31.16 24.47 39.69 31.17 25.2 19.79 32 41
71 39.57 31.08 50.41 39.59 28.4 22.30 25 32
80 50.24 39.46 64.00 50.26 32.0 25.13 20 25
90 63.58 49.94 81.00 63.62 36.0 28.27 16 20
100 78.50 61.66 100.00 78.54 40.0 31.42 13 16
110 94.98 74.60 121.00 95.03 44.0 34.56 11 13
125 122.66 96.34 156.25 122.72 50.0 39.27 8 10
140 153.86 120.84 196.00 152.94 56.0 43.98 6 8
160 200.96 157.84 256.00 201.06 64.0 50.27 5 6
180 254.34 199.76 324.00 254.47 72.0 56.55 4 5
200 314.00 246.62 400.00 314.16 80.0 62.83 3 4

MILD STEEL FLATS

DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Thickness
T 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 25.0
Width
b mm
12 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 - - - - -
16 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.0 - - - - -
20 0.47 0.63 0.79 0.94 1.3 1.6 - - - -
25 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 - - -
30 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.4 2.8 - - -
35 0.85 1.1 1.4 1.6 2.2 2.8 3.3 4.4 5.6 -
40 0.9 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.8 5.0 6.3 -
45 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 5.6 7.1 8.8
50 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.7 6.3 7.8 9.8
55 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.6 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.9 8.6 10.8
60 1.4 1.9 2.4 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 7.5 9.7 11.8
63 - - - 3.0 4.0 4.9 5.9 7.9 9.9 12.4
70 - - - 3.3 4.4 5.5 6.6 - - -
75 - - - 3.5 4.7 5.9 7.1 9.4 11.8 14.7
80 - - - 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5 10.0 12.6 15.7
90 - - - 4.2 5.6 7.1 8.4 11.3 14.1 17.7
100 - - - 4.7 6.3 7.8 9.4 12.6 15.7 19.6
110 - - - 5.2 6.9 8.6 10.4 - - -
125 - - - 5.9 7.8 9.8 11.8 15.7 19.6 24.5
130 - - - - 8.2 10.2 12.2 - - -
140 - - - - 8.8 11.0 13.2 - - -
150 - - - - 9.4 11.8 14.1 18.8 23.6 29.5
200 - - - - - 15.7 18.8 25.6 - -
250 - - - - - 19.6 23.6 31.4 - -
300 - - - - - - 28.3 - - -
400 - - - - - - - - -
Note : The weight per metre are calculated on the basis taht streel weight 7.85
g/cm3 and are rounded off to oen decimel place in Kgs

ROLLED STEEL EQUAL ANGLES

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Size AxB Thickness Sectional area Weight per Moduli section
Mmxmm t meter w Zxx=zyy
mm a Kg cm2
cm
ISA 2020 20x20 3.0 1.12 0.9 0.3
4.0 1.45 1.1 0.4
ISA 2525 25x25 3.0 1.41 1.1 0.4
4.0 1.84 1.4 0.6
5.0 1.15 1.8 0.7
ISA 3030 30x30 3.0 2.03 1.6 0.9
4.0 2.66 2.1 1.2
5.0 3.27 2.6 1.4
ISA 3535 35x35 3.0 2.03 1.6 0.9
4.0 2.66 2.1 1.2
5.0 3.27 2.6 1.4
6.0 3.86 3.0 1.7
ISA 4040 40x40 3.0 2.34 1.8 1.2
4.0 3.07 2.4 1.6
5.0 3.78 3.0 1.9
6.0 4.47 3.5 2.3
ISA 4545 45x45 3.0 2.64 2.1 1.5
4.0 3.47 2.7 2.0
5.0 4.28 3.4 2.5
6.0 5.07 4.0 2.9
ISA 5050 50x50 3.0 2.95 2.3 1.9
4.0 3.88 3.0 2.5
5.0 4.79 3.8 3.1
6.0 5.68 4.5 3.6
ISA 5555 55x55 5.0 5.27 4.1 3.7
6.0 6.26 4.9 4.4
8.0 8.18 6.4 5.7
10.0 10.02 7.9 7.0
ISA 6060 60x60 5.0 5.75 4.5 4.4
6.0 6.84 5.4 5.2
8.0 8.96 7.0 6.8
10.0 11.00 8.6 8.4
ISA 6565 65x65 5.0 6.25 4.9 5.2
6.0 7.44 5.8 8.2
8.0 9.76 7.7 8.1
10.0 12.00 9.4 9.9

ROLLED STEEL EQUAL ANGLES

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Size AxB Thickness Sectional area Weight per Moduli section
Mmxmm t meter zxx=zyy
mm a w
cm. Kg cm2
ISA 7070 70x70 5.0 6.77 5.3 6.1
8.0 8.06 6.3 7.3
8.0 10.58 8.3 8.5
10.0 13.02 10.2 11.7
ISA 7575 75x75 5.0 7.27 5.7 7.1
6.0 8.66 6.8 8.4
8.0 11.38 8.9 11.0
10.0 14.02 11.0 13.5
ISA 8080 80x80 6.0 92.19 7.3 9.6
 8.0 12.21 9.6 12.6
10.0 15.05 11.8 15.5
12.0 17.81 14.0 18.3
ISA 9090 90x90 6.0 10.47 8.2 12.2
8.0 13.79 10.8 16.0
10.0 17.03 13.4 19.8
12.0 20.19 15.8 23.3
ISA 100100 100x100 6.0 11.67 9.2 15.2
8.0 15.39 12.1 20.0
10.0 19.03 14.9 24.7
12.0 22.59 17.7 29.2
ISA 110110 110x110 8.0 17.02 13.4 24.4
10.0 21.06 16.5 30.1
12.0 35.02 19.6 35.7
15.0 30.81 24.2 43.7
ISA 130130 130x130 8.0 20.22 15.9 34.5
10.0 25.06 19.7 34.5
12.0 29.82 23.4 50.7
15.0 36.81 28.9 62.3
ISA 150150 150x150 10.0 29.03 22.8 56.9
12.0 34.59 27.2 67.7
15.0 52.78 33.6 83.5
18.0 50.79 39.9 98.7
ISA 200200 200x200 12.0 46.61 36.6 122.2
15.0 57.80 45.4 151.4
18.0 68.81 54.0 179.9
25.0 93.80 73.6 243.3
.

ROLLED STEEL UNEQUAL ANGLES

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Size AxB Thickness Sectional area Weight per Moduli section
Mmxmm t meter zxx=zyy
mm a w
cm Kg cm2.
ISA 3020 30x20 3.0 1.41 1.1 0.60.2
4.0 1.84 1.4 0.80.3
5.0 2.25 1.8 1.00.4
ISA 4025 40x25 3.0 1.88 1.5 1.10.5
4.0 2.46 1.9 1.40.6
5.0 3.02 2.4 1.80.7
6.0 3.56 2.8 2.10.9
ISA 4530 45x30 3.0 2.18 1.7 1.40.7
4.0 2.68 2.2 1.90.9
5.0 3.52 2.8 2.31.1
 6.0 4.16 3.3 2.71.3
ISA 5030 50x30 3.0 2.34 1.8 1.70.7
4.0 3.07 2.4 2.30.9
5.0 3.78 3.0 2.81.1
6.0 4.47 3.5 3.41.3
ISA 6040 60x40 5.0 4.76 3.7 4.22.0
6.0 5.65 4.4 5.02.3
8.0 7.37 5.8 6.53.0
ISA 6545 65x45 5.0 5.26 4.1 5.02.5
6.0 6.25 4.9 5.93.0
8.0 8.17 6.4 7.73.9
ISA 7045 70x45 5.0 5.52 4.3 5.72.5
6.0 6.56 5.2 6.83.0
8.0 8.58 6.7 8.93.9
10.0 10.52 8.3 10.94.8
ISA 7550 75x50 5.0 6.02 4.7 6.73.2
6.0 7.16 5.6 8.03.8
8.0 9.38 7.4 10.44.9
10.0 10.52 9.0 12.76.0
ISA 8050 80x50 5.0 6.27 4.9 7.53.2
6.0 7.49 5.9 9.03.8
8.0 9.78 7.7 11.74.9
10.0 12.02 9.4 14.46.0

ROLLED STEEL UNEQUAL ANGLES

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Size AxB Thickness Sectional Weight per Moduli section

mmxmm t area meter zxx=zyy
mm a w
cm Kg cm2
ISA 9060 90x60 6.0 8.65 6.8 11.5 5.5
8.0 11.37 8.9 15.1 7.2
10.0 14.01 11.0 18.6 8.8
12.0 16.57 13.0 22.0 10.3
ISA 10065 100x65 6.0 9.55 7.5 14.2 6.4
8.0 12.57 9.9 18.7 8.5
10.0 15.51 12.2 23.1 10.4
ISA 10075 100x75 6.0 10.14 8.0 14.4 8.5
8.0 13.36 10.5 19.1 11.2
10.0 16.50 13.0 23.6 13.8
12.0 19.56 15.4 27.9 16.3
ISA 12575 125x75 6.0 11.66 9.2 22.2 8.7
 8.0 15.38 12.1 29.4 11.5
10.0 19.02 14.9 36.3 14.2
ISA 12595 125x95 6.0 12.86 10.1 23.1 14.0
8.0 16.98 13.3 30.6 18.5
10.0 21.02 16.5 37.8 22.9
12.0 24.98 19.6 44.8 27.1
ISA 15075 150x75 8.0 17.42 13.7 41.7 11.8
10.0 21.56 16.9 51.6 14.5
12.0 25.62 20.1 61.2 17.1
ISA 150115 150x115 8.0 20.58 16.2 44.2 27.2
10.0 25.52 20.0 54.9 33.8
12.0 30.38 23.8 65.3 40.2
15.0 37.52 29.5 80.4 49.4
ISA 200100 200x100 10.3 29.03 22.8 92.8 26.2
12.0 34.59 27.2 110.6 31.1
15.0 42.78 33.6 136.5 38.3
ISA 300150 200x150 10.0 34.00 16.7 98.3 58.3
12.0 40.56 31.8 117.4 69.7
15.0 50.25 39.4 145.4 86.0
18.0 59.76 46.9 172.5 108.9

ROLLED STEEL CHANNELS

Dimensions and Properties

Designatio Weight Sewction Depth of Weight of Thickness Thickness

n per metre area section flange of flange of web
a h b tf tw

W.Kg Cm2 Mm mm Mm mm
ISJC 100 5.8 7.41 100 45 5.1 3.0
ISJC 125 7.9 10.07 125 50 6.6 3.0
ISJC 150 9.9 12.65 150 55 6.9 3.6
ISJC 175 11.2 14.24 175 60 6.9 3.6

ISJC 200 13.9 17.77 200 70 7.1 4.1

ISJC 75 5.7 7.26 75 40 6.0 3.7
ISJC 100 7.9 10.02 100 50 6.4 4.0
ISJC 125 10.7 13.67 125 65 6.6 4.4

ISJC 150 14.4 18.36 150 75 7.8 4.8

ISJC 175 17.6 22.40 175 75 9.5 5.1
ISJC 200 20.6 26.22 200 75 10.8 5.1
ISJC 225 24.0 30.53 225 90 10.2 5.8
ISJC 250 28.0 35.65 250 100 10.7 6.1
ISJC 200 33.1 42.11 200 100 11.6 6.7
ISJC 350 38.8 49.47 350 100 12.5 7.4
ISJC 400 45.7 58.25 400 100 14.0 8.0

ISMC 75 6.8 8.67 75 40 7.3 4.4

ISMC 100 9.2 11.70 100 50 7.5 4.7
ISMC 125 12.7 16.19 125 65 8.1 5.0
ISMC 150 16.4 20.88 150 75 9.0 5.4

ISMC 175 19.1 24.38 175 75 10.2 5.7

ISMC 200 22.1 18.21 200 75 11.4 6.1
ISMC 225 25.9 33.01 225 80 12.4 6.4
ISMC 250 30.4 38.67 250 80 14.1 7.1

ISMC 300 35.8 45.64 300 90 13.6 7.6

ISMC 350 42.1 53.66 350 100 13.5 8.1
ISMC 400 49.4 82.93 400 100 15.3 8.6

ROLLED STEEL CHANNELS

Dimensions and Properties

Centre of Moments of interia Radii OF Gryation Moduli of Section

Gravity
Cy lxx lvy Rxx Ruu Zxx Zyy
cm cm2 cm2 cm cm Cm Cm

1.40 123.8 14.9 4.09 1.42 24.8 4.8

1.64 270.0 25.7 5.18 1.60 43.2 7.6
1.66 471.1 37.9 6.10 1.73 62.8 9.9
1.75 719.9 50.5 7.11 1.88 82.3 11.9

1.97 1161.2 84.2 8.08 2.18 116.1 16.7

1.35 66.1 11.5 3.02 1.26 17.6 4.3
1.62 164.7 24.8 4.06 1.57 32.9 7.3
2.04 356.8 57.2 5.11 2.05 57.1 12.8

2.38 697.2 103.2 6.16 2.37 93.0 20.2

2.40 1148.4 126.5 7.16 2.38 131.3 24.8
2.35 1725.5 146.9 8.11 2.37 172.6 28.5
2.46 1547.9 206.5 9.14 2.62 226.5 32.0
2.70 3687.9 298.4 10.17 2.89 295.0 40.9
2.55 6047.9 346.0 11.98 2.87 403.2 46.4
2.41 9312.6 394.6 13.72 2.82 532.1 52.0
2.36 13989.5 460.4 15.50 2.81 699.5 60.2

1.31 76.0 12.6 2.96 1.21 20.3 4.7

1.53 186.7 25.9 4.00 1.49 37.3 7.5
1.94 416.7 59.9 5.07 1.92 66.6 13.0
2.22 779.4 102.3 6.11 2.21 103.9 19.4

2.20 1223.3 121.0 7.08 2.23 139.8 22.8

2.17 1819.3 140.4 8.03 2.23 181.9 26.3
2.30 2649.6 187.2 2.03 2.38 239.5 32.8
2.30 3816.8 219.1 9.94 2.38 305.3 38.4
.
2.36 6382.6 310.8 11.81 2.61 424.3 46.8
2.44 10008.0 430.6 13.66 2.83 571.9 57.0
2.42 15382.8 504.8 15.48 2.83 754.1 66.6
.

ROLLED STEEL CHANNELS

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Weight per Sectional Depth of Weight of Thickness Thickness

metre Area section flange of flange of web
A h b tf tw

W.Kg Cm2 Mm mm mm Mm
ISJB 150 7.1 9.01 150 50 4.6 3.0
ISJB 175 8.1 10.28 175 50 4.8 3.2
ISJB 200 9.9 12.64 200 60 5.0 3.4
ISJB 225 12.8 16.28 225 80 5.0 3.7
ISLB 75 6.1 7.71 75 50 5.0 3.7
ISLB 100 8.0 10.21 100 50 6.4 4.0
ISLB 125 11.9 15.12 125 75 6.5 4.4
ISLB 150 14.2 18.08 150 80 6.8 4.8
ISLB 175 16.7 21.30 175 90 6.9 5.1
ISLB 200 19.8 25.27 200 100 7.3 5.4
ISLB 225 23.5 29.92 225 100 8.6 5.8
ISLB 250 27.9 35.53 250 125 8.2 6.1
ISLB 275 33.0 42.02 275 140 8.8 6.4
ISLB 300 37.7 48.08 300 150 9.4 6.7
ISLB 325 43.1 54.90 325 165 9.6 7.0
ISLB 350 49.5 63.01 350 165 11.4 7.4
ISLB 400 56.9 72.43 400 165 12.5 8.0
ISLB 450 65.3 83.14 450 170 13.4 8.6
ISLB 500 75.0 95.50 500 180 14.1 9.2
ISLB 550 86.3 109.97 550 190 15.0 9.9
ISLB 600 99.5 126.69 600 210 15.5 10.5
ISMB 100 11.5 14.60 100 70 7.5 4.5
ISMB 125 13..4 17.00 125 70 8.0 5.0
ISMB 150 15..0 19.00 150 75 8.0 5.0
ISMB 175 19.5 24.62 175 85 9.0 5.8
ISMB 200 25.4 32.33 200 100 10.8 5.7
ISMB 225 31.2 39.72 225 110 11.8 6.5
ISMB 250 37.3 47.55 250 125 12.5 6.9
ISMB 300 46.10 56.26 300 140 13.1 7.7
ISMB 350 52.4 66.71 350 140 14.2 8.1

ROLLED STEEL CHANNELS

Dimensions and Properties

Designation Weight per Sectional Depth of Weight of Thickness Thickness

metre Area section flange of flange of web
A h b tf tw

w.kg c.m2 mm mm mm mm
ISMB 400 61.5 78.46 400 140 16.0 8.9
ISMB 450 72.4 92.27 450 150 17.4 9.4
ISMB 500 86.9 110.74 500 180 17.2 10.2
ISMB 550 103.7 132.11 550 190 19.3 11.2
ISMB 600 122.6 156.21 600 210 20.8 12.3
ISWB 150 17.0 21.67 150 100 7.0 5.4
ISWB 175 22.1 28.11 175 125 74 5.8
ISWB 200 28.8 36.71 200 140 9.0 6.1
ISWB 225 33.9 43.24 225 150 9.9 6.4
ISWB 250 40.9 52.05 250 200 9.0 6.7
ISWB 300 48.1 61.33 300 200 10.0 7.4
ISWB 350 56.9 72.50 350 200 11.4 8.0
ISWB 400 66.7 85.01 400 200 13.0 8.6
ISWB 450 79.4 101.15 450 200 15.4 9.2
ISWB 500 95.2 121.22 500 250 14.7 9.9
ISWB 550 112.5 143.34 550 250 17.6 10.5
ISWB 600 133.7 170.38 600 250 21.3 11.2
ISWB 600 145.1 184.86 600 250 23.6 11.8
ISHB 150 27.1 34.48 150 150 9.0 5.4
ISHB 150 30.6 38.88 150 150 9.0 8.4
ISHB 150 34.6 44.08 150 150 9.0 11.8
ISHB 200 37.3 47.54 200 200 9.0 6.1
ISHB 200 40.0 50.94 200 200 9.0 7.8
ISHB 225 43.1 54.94 225 225 9.1 6.5
ISHB 225 46.8 59.66 225 225 9.1 8.6
ISHB 250 51.0 64.96 250 250 9.7 6.9
ISHB 250 54.7 69.71 250 250 9.7 8.8

STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES

Nominal Bore Outside Class (mm) Wall thickness Weight
(mm) Diameter (Kg/m2)
(mm)
15 213 H 3.25 1.43
20 269 H 3.25 1.90
25 337 M 3.25 2.46
H 4.05 2.99
32 424 M 3.25 3.15
40 483 H 4.05 3.86
M 3.25 3.61
50 603 H 4.05 4.43
L-2 3.25 5.10
M 3.65 6.17
65 761 H 4.50 7.92
L 3.25 5.84
M 3.65 6.53
80 889 H 4.50 7.92
L 3.25 6.86
M 4.05 8.48
90 1016 H 4.85 10.10
L 3.65 8.82
M 4.05 9.75
100 1143 H 4.85 11.60
L 3.65 9.97
M 4.50 12.40
110 1270 H 5.40 14.50
 L 4.50 12.20
M 4.85 14.60
125 1397 H 5.40 16.20
L 4.50 14.90
M 4.85 16.20
135 1524 H 5.40 17.90
L 4.50 16.40
M 4.85 17.70
150 1651 H 5.40 19.50
L 4.50 17.80
M 4.85 19.20
150 1683 H 5.40 21.20
L 4.50 18.10
M 4.85 19.60
H-1 5.40 21.70
175 1937 H 6.30 25.30
L 4.85 22.60
M 5.40 25.00
200 2191 H 5.90 27.30
L 4.85 25.70
M 5.60 29.40
225 2445 H 5.90 31.00
H 5.90 34.20

WIRE AND SHEET METAL GAUGES

No Dia or Thickness in mm No Dia or Thickness in mm
SWG BG B& Sor SWG BG B& Sor
7/0 12.700 16.93 - 23 0.610 0.707 0.573
6/0 11.786 15.88 - 24 0.559 0.629 0.511
5/0 10.973 14.94 - 25 0.508 0.560 0.455
4/0 10.160 13.76 11.68 26 0.457 0.498 0.405
3/0 9.449 12.70 10.40 27 0.417 0.443 0.361
2/0 8.839 11.31 9.27 28 0.376 0.397 0.321
0 8.230 10.07 8.25 29 0.345 0.312 0.286
1 7.620 44.81 8.971 30 0.315 0.312 0.255
2 7.010 79.93 6.54 31 0.295 0.279 0.227
3 6.401 71.22 5.83 32 0.274 0.249 0.202
4 5.893 63.50 5.19 33 0.254 0.221 0.180
5 5.385 56.52 4.62 34 0.234 0.196 0.160
6 4.877 50.32 4.11 35 0.213 0.175 0.143
7 4.470 44.81 3.67 36 0.193 0.155 0.127
8 4.064 44.81 3.26 37 0.173 0.137 0.113
9 3.658 35.51 2.91 38 0.152 0.122 0.101
10 3.251 31.75 2.59 39 0.132 0.109 0.090
11 2.946 28.27 2.30 40 0.122 0.098 0.080
12 2.642 25.17 2.05 41 0.112 0.087 -
13 2.337 22.40 1.83 42 0.102 0.078 -
14 2.032 19.94 1.63 43 0.091 0.069 -
15 1.829 17.75 1.45 44 0.081 0.061 -
16 1.626 15.88 1.29 45 0.071 0.055 -
17 1.422 14.12 1.15 46 0.061 0.049 -
18 1.219 12.57 1.02 47 0.051 0.043 -
 19 1.016 11.18 0.91 48 0.041 0.039 -
20 0.914 09.96 0.81 49 0.030 0.034 -
21 0.813 08.86 0.72 50 0.025 0.030 -
22 0.711 07.94 0.64 51 - 0.027 -
.
WEIGHT OF M.S CHEQUERED PLATE
Thickness in mm 5 6 7 8 10 12
Weight –Kg/sq.m 45.3 53.2 61.1 68.8 84.6 100.3

WEIGHT & STANDARD SIZES OF STEEL PLATES

Thickness 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 16
in mm
Weight- 39.2 47.1 55.0 62.8 78.5 94.2 109.9 125.6
Kg/sq.m
Thickness 18 20 22 25 28 32 36 38
in mm
Weight- 141.3 157.0 112.7 196.2 219.8 251.2 282.6 298.3
Kg/sq.m
Thickness 40 45 50 53 56 63 67 71
in mm
Weight- 314.0 353.2 392.5 416.05 439.6 494.5 525.95 557.4
Kg/sq.m
Thickness 75 80 90 100 120
in mm
Weight- 588.75 628.0 706.4 785.0 942.0
Kg/sq.m

Atomic Weight (O = 16)

Element Symbol Atom Valency Element Symbol Atom Valency
Wt. Wt.
Aluminium Al 026.97 3 Manganese Mn 054.93 2,3,4
Antimony Sb 121.76 3,5 Mercury Hg 0.200.6 1,2
Argon A 0.39.944 - Molybdenum Mo 925.95 3,6
Arsenic As 074.93 3,5 Neon Ne 020.18
Barium Ba 137.36 - Nickel NI 058.69 2,3,4
Bismuth Bi 208.0 3,5 Nitrogen N 014.01 3,5
Born B 010.82 3,4 Oxygen O 016.00 2
Bromine Br 079.92 1,5,7 Phosphorus P 030.98 3,5
Cadmium Cd 112.41 2 Platinum Pt 195.2 2,4
Calcium Ca 040.07 2 Potassium K 039.1 1
Carbon C 012.0 2,4 Radium Ra 226.05 2
Chlorine Ci 035.45 1,5,7 Selenium Se 078.96 2,6
Chromium Cr 052.01 3,6 Silicon Si 028.06 4
Cobalt Co 058.95 2,3 Silver Ag 107.88 1
Copper Cu 063.57 1,2 Sodium Na 023.0 1
Fluorine F 019.0 1 Seontium Sr 087.63 2
Gold Au 197.2 1,3 Sulphur S 032.6 2,4
Helium Ae 004.003 - Tellurium Te 127.61 2,6
Hydrogen H 001.008 1,3,5 Titanium Ti 047.90 3,4
Iodine I 126.9 1 Tin Sn 118.7 2,4
Iridium Ir 193.1 2,3,4 Tungsten W 184.0 3,4,6
iron Fe 055.84 2,3 Uranium U 238.07 4,6
Lead Pb 207.2 2,4 Vanadium V 050.95 1 to 5
Lithium Li 006.94 1 Zinc Zn 065.38 2
Magnesium Mg 024.32 2 Zirconium Zr 091.22 4

CIVIL INFORMATION
** Cement mortar should be used within 30 minutes immediately after
addition of water. Maortar left unused for two hours should be rejected.
** Mixing time in mechanical mixture : Concrete : 2 min Mortar : 1 Min
** Tolerance on weight o for round and square bars worked on the base 0.785
Kg/Sq.cm of cross sectional area per metre run.
Upto and including 8mm : + 4 percent over 8mm : + 2.5 percent
** Weather range for placing concrete 4.50C to 380C
** Curing time for: a) Plain cement concrete-14 days) Flooring 10 days
b) Reinforced cement concrete 10 days e) Plastering Pointing 7 days
c) Brick work stone work 7 days
** Bond stone: At least one bond stone (for wall thickness 60 cm) or set of
bond stones with overlap of 15 cm. (for wall thickness more than 60 cms)
shall be provided for every 0.5 sq.m of wall surface of stone of stone
masonary.
 Miscellaneous Civil Information

1. Reduction in strength of concrete made with stored cement.

Period of storage of cement (month) 1 3 6 12 54
Approx. relative strength at 928 days percent) 100 80 70 60 50
2. Removal of forms:
a) Sides of foundations, columns, beams and walls 2 days
b) Under sides of slabs upto 4.,5 m span 7 days
c) Under sides of slabs above 4.5 cm span and
under sides of beam and arches upto 6m span 14 days
d) Under sides of beam and arches upto 6m
span and upto 9m span 21 days
e) Underside of beams and arches over 9m span 28 days
Note: For rapid hardening cement 3/7 of the above period except the vertical
sides of slabs, beams etc should be retained for at laast 24 hrs. Cantilevers
should be provided with counteracting loads before removal of form work.
3. Approximate percentages of strength of ordinary Portland cement at
different ages in comparison with the strength at 28 days
Age: 1 day 3 days 7 days 28 days 3 months 6 months 12 months
 16 40 67 100 122 146 155
4. Relation between cube strength and water-cement ratio by weight for fully
compacted concrete (Portland cement)
Cube crushing strength
Water cement ratio (Kg/sq.cm)
By weight 7 days 28 days
0.35 400 530
0.40 350 470
0.45 300 420
0.50 250 370
0.55 220 320
0.60 180 280
0.65 150 250
0.70 130 220
0.75 110 200
0.80 105 180
** Volume of one bag of cement is 0.347 cum
** Measuring box to be used at site (Size 35x25x40 cm.)
** Void to be deducted from stack measurements of
a) Stone metal 40mmm gauge and above 7.5%
b) Soling Stone/boulders 100m and above 45%
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Deductions for Voids
The volume of stacks, shall be reduced by percentages as shown against each
other for looseness in stacking to arrive at the net quantity for payment. No
reduction shall be made in respect of articles or materials for which mode of
payment is by length or weight or member.
1 Earth
1.1 in lose stocks such as cart loads, lorry loads etc, - 20%
1.2 in fills consolidated by light mechanical machinery -10%
1.3 in fills consolidated by heavy mechanical machinery, but not under OMC
(Optimum Moisture Content) – 5%
1.4 in fills consolidated by heavy mechanical machinery at OMC-Nil
1.5 Consolidated fills in confined situations such as under floors. Etc-Nil
2 Moorum, building rubbish Lime and sand-Nil
3 Stone metal, 40mm nominal size and above – 7.5%
4 Coarse aggregate metal below 40mm nominal size Nil
5 Soiling stone/boulder 100 mm and above, 15%
6 Excavated rocxks – 50%
FOUNDATION AND PLINTH
The work in foundation and Plinth shall include @
a) For building: all works upto 1.2 metres above ground level or upto floor 1
level whichever is less.
b) For abutments, pier and well stening. All works upto 1.2 m above the bed
level
c) For retaining walls, wing walls, compound walls, chimneys, overhead
reservoir/tanks and other elevated structures: All works upto 1.2 metres
above the ground level.
d) For reservoir/tanks (other than over head reservoir/tanks)
All works upto 1.2 metres above the ground level or upto floor-1 level
whichever is less
e) For basements: all works upto 1.2 m above the ground level or upto floor 1
level whichever is lower:
Note: Specific provisions shall be made in the estimate for such situations where
the foundation level is more than 3 (three) metre depth from the plinth for all
types of structure mentioned above.

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CEMENT CONCRETE CUBE

(C.P.W.D Specification Vol-II Clause 5.4.10.)
1. Sample: Three cubes set out of one sample consisting of six ccubes
15cmx15cmx15cm.
Acceptance Criteria:
(A) 7-Days trial: The average of the strength of three specimen shall be accepted
as the compressive strength of the concrete provide:
1. If the variation in strength of three specimen shall be accepted as the
compressive strength of the concrete provide:
2. If the difference between the maximum and minimum strength exceed 30%
of the average strength of three specimen.
3. If the difference between maximum and minimum strength should not
exceed 30% of the average strength and 28 days test shall have to be carried
out.
4. If the actual average strength of sample is equal to or higher than specified
strength upto 15% than strength of concrete shall be considered in order.
5. If the actual average strength of sample is lower than the specified or higher
by more than 15% than 28 days test shall have to be carried out.
(B) 28 Days Test:
The average of the strength for three specimen shall be accepted as the
comp. Strength of the concrete provided:
1. If the strength of any individual cube shall neither be less than 70% nor
higher than 130% of the specified strength.
2. If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than specified
strength but not less than 70% of the specified strength the concrete may be
accepted at reduced rates at the discretion of E-incharge.
STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
Conc. Mix (Nominal Mix on volume basis) Compressive Strength
7-days 28 days
1.1 d 210 315
1.1.3 175 265
1.2.4 140 210
 DESIGN MIX/READY MIX CONCRETE
Note : the minimum mix of M25 shall be used is all structural elements in both
load bearing & R.C.C framed construction.
Assumed Standard Deviation (IS:456:2000)
Grade of concrete Assumed Standard Deviation *N/mm2
M10 3.5
M15 3.5
M20 4.0
M25 4.0
M30 5.0
M35 5.0
M40 5.0
M45 5.0
M50 5.0
The target mean strength of concrete mix. Should be equal to the characteristic
strength plus 1.65 times the standard deviation.
GRADE OF CONCRETE
(IS: 456-2000)
Concrete Specific characteristic comp. strength at
Mix 28 days test (cube) (N/mm2)
a) Ordinary Con. M10 10
M15 15
M20 20
b) Standard Con. M25 25
M30 30
M35 35
M40 40
M45 45
M55 55
 Acceptability on the basis of assumed standard deviation
Specified Grade Mean. Strength (N/mm2) Individual (N/mm2)
M15 15+0.825x3.5=18N/mm2 (183Kg/cm2) Or 15.3=12N/mm2(123Kg/cm2)
15+0.825x3.5=18N/m2 (183Kg/cm2)
Whichever is greater
M20 20+0.825x4.0=23.5N/mm2 Or 20.4=16N/mm2(163Kg/cm2)
20+4=24N/m2 (245Kg/cm2)
Whichever is greater
M25 25+0.825x4.0=28.5N/mm2 Or 26.5=21N/mm2(214Kg/cm2)
25+4=29N/m2 (300Kg/cm2)
Whichever is greater
M30 30+0.825x5.0=34.5N/mm2 (325Kg/cm2) Or 30.4=26N/mm2(265Kg/cm2)
30+4=34Nmm2
Whichever is greater
M35 35+0.825x5.0=39.5N/mm2 Or 35.4=31N/mm2(316Kg/cm2)
403Kg/cm2)
35+4=39 N/mm2
Whichever is greater
M40 40+0.825x5.0=44.5N/mm2 Or 40.4=36N/mm2(367Kg/cm2)
(454Kg/cm2) (35+4=44N/mm2)
Whichever is greater
 List of mandatory Test (Required Building Materials)
Material Test Field Laboratory Min. Qty of Frequency of Testing
Material for
Carrying out
Test
Water For construction Lab Per Bore Every three months per
purpose only Lab source/bore
Cement Physical Lab Each lot Every 0 tyonn
requirement
Sand Organic Field 20 cum Every 20cum or part
inpurities thereof or more frequently
decided by Engineer-in-
Charge
Field 20 cum
Silt content Field or Lab as 40 cum ..do..
Particle size decided by the 40 cum or part thereof
Distribution
Engineer-in-charge 20 cum
Bulking of sand Field Every 20 cum or part
thereof or more frequently
as decided by Engineer-in-
Charge
Stone aggregate Percentage of soil General visual One test for each One test for each source
or deleterious inspection/laboratory source
material test Where required
by the engineer-
in-charge
Particle size Field/lab 10cum
Every 40cum or part
distribution thereof
Estimation of Field/Lab 10cum ..do..
organic
impurities
Surface moisture Field/Lab 10cum ..do..
Determination
10% fine value
Specified gravity 10cum
Field/Lab ..do..
Bulk density
10 cum
Aggregate
Field/Lab 10cum ..do..
crushing strength
Field/Lab 10cum ..do..
Aggregate
Field/Lab 10cum ..do..
impact value
Field/Lab 10cum ..do..

Concrete Slump test Field 10 cum 15 cum or part thereof

Computing factor Field 20 cum 20 cum or part thereof
Weight, cement Field/batch
 factor and air Plant laboratory 20 cum Every 20 cum or part
content test thereof
Reinforced Slump test Field/Lab 5 cum in case of Every 5 cum or part
cement concrete column and thereof
(Nominal Mix) connected 20 cum for slabs,beams
columns Every 20 cum or part
20cum for other thereof
R.C.C work for ..do..
all other small
items and where
R.C.C done in a
day is less than 5
cum test may be
carried out as
required by
Engineer-in-
charge
5 cum in case of
column
Cube test Lab
20 cum for slabs, Every 5 cum or part
beams and thereof
connected Every 20 cum or part
columns thereof
20 cum for other
R.C.C Work for
all other small
items and where
..do…
R.C.C done in a
day is less than 5
cum test may be
carried out as
required by
Engineer-in-
charge
Bricks/Brick Testing of laboratory As per table 3&4 50,000 bricks or part
Tiles Bricks/Brick tile CPWD thereof
for dimensions specification
comprehensive Vol.II
strength water
absorption and
efforescence
Timber Moisture content Field(by moisture 1 cum Every one cum or part
meter) laboratory test thereof
as required by
Engineer-in-charge
Flush door End immersion laboratory 26 shutters As per sampling and
test testing specified in clause
knife test 9.7.10
adhesion test
Aluminium door Thickness of Lab If the cost of Rs 20,000/- or part thereof
or window anodic coating fitting exceed as required by Engineer-in-
fitting 20,000/- charge
Mortice locks Testing of spring lab 50 Nos 100 or part thereof
Appendix “G”
Steel if arranged Tensile strength Lab. 20 tonne Every 20 tonne of part
by the contractor Bend test thereof
elongation
Terrazzo tiles Transverse
strength IS: 1237-1980 One test for every 10,000
 Water absorption Laboratory 5000 Nos Nos
Abrasion test

White glazed Water absorption Lab 3000 Nos 3000 Nos or part thereof
tiles (for floor & Crazing test
wall) Impact strength
Chemical
resistant test

Test for Dimensional Tolerance of Bricks/Tiles

Modular bricks Non modular brocks Non Modular Bricks
(Class 10) (forother class)
Length 372 to 388 cm (380 + 8 cm) 441 to 459 cm 432 to 468 cm
Width 176 to 184 (380 + 8 cm) 218 to 226 cm 213 to 231 cm
Height i) Bricks 176 to 184 cm (380 + 8 cm) 138 to 142 cm (for 134 to 146 cm (for
90mm (high bricks) 70mm high bricks) 70mm high bricks)
ii) Bricks Tiles:76to84 cm (80 +4cm) 86 to 90 (for 44mm 84 to 92 (for 44mm
40mm high brick tiles high brick tiles) high brick tiles)

Classification: brick/brick tiles shall be classified on the basis of their

minimum compressive strength as given below
Class designation Average compressive strength
Not Less than Less than
N/mm2 Kg/cm2 N/mm2 Kg/cm2
10(100) 10 (100) 12.5 (125)
7.5(75) 7.5 (75) 10.0 (100)
5.0(50) 5.0 (50) 7.5 (75)
3.5(35) 3.5 (35) 5.0 (50
 Soil Tests available and their rates at C.P.W.D Soil Testing Laboratory at
I.P Bhavan, New Delhi

S.No Name of material Quantity for one sample

1 Stone aggregate 30 kg to 100 kg depending upon size of

aggregate & test required
2 Bricks 15 bricks inclusive of five bricks with frog filled.
3 Cement 10 kgs (App.)
4 Water 5 Litre
5 Steel TMT/Tor One piece of 40 cm & two piece of 60 cm
6 Mild steel (strip in flat shape one piece 30 cm & one piece
60
7 Sand 10 Kg (App)
8 Zinc coating test
i. For sheets Three pieces 50x50mm as per IS Code
ii. For pipes Three pipes of 100mm length
9 Plywood 1mx1m
10 Particle board 1mx1m
11 Block board 1mx1m
12 Bitumen Five Kgs
13 Butuminous concrete One Kg
14 C.C. floor tiles Twelve Nos full size & 6 Nos 7.07x7.07 cm
15 Ceramic/glazed tiles As per specification/IS codes
16 Flush door shutter One full shutter
17 Type test of door shutter One full shutter
18 Stones 5 Kg or 30x30 cm piece
19 Timber 45 cm long piece
20 Aluminium (anodic coating) 30 cm long section piece
21 C.C. cubes Multiple of three
 Theoretical consumption of Paints, Primer Distemper etc
1 Painting with ready mixed paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.75 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.25 Litre
2 Painting with synthetic enamel paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.70 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.16 Litre
3 Distempering with dry distemper
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 1.00 Kg
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.50 Kg
4 Distempering with oil bound distemper
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 1.00 Kg
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.50 Kg
5 Wall Painting with plastic emulsion paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.73 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.21 Litre
6 Spray Painting with flat wall paints
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.65 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.10 Litre
7 Finishing walls with water proofing cement paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 2.20 Kg
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 3.84 Kg
8 Applying Priming coat with ready mixed primer
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.54 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 0.75 Litre
9 French spirit polishing
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.98 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.63 Litre
10 Painting with ready enamel paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.61 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.00 Litre
11 Painting with oil type wood preservative
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.81 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.00 Litre
12 Painting with aluminium paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.46 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 0.80 Litre
13 Floor Painting
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.96 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 1.48 Litre
14 Painting with black anticorrosive bitumestic paint
(a) One or more coat 10 Sqm 0.57 Litre
(b) Two or more coats 10 Sqm 0.95 Litre
15 Distempering with oil bound with cement primer 10 Sqm 0.70 Litre
 Equivalent Plain Areas of Uneven Surface
S.No Description of Work How measured Multiplying
1. Wood Word Doors. Windows Coefficient
ETC
1 Paneled or framed and braced doors 1.30 (for each side)
windows etc
2 Ledged and battened or lodged- Chowhat or frame,
battened and braced doors, windows Edhes, chocks, cleats etc,
etc shall be deemed to be
included in the dem
3 Flush doors etc ..do.. 1.20 (for each side)
4 Partly paneled and partly glazed or ..do.. 1.00 (for each side)
gauzed doors, windows etc.
[excluding painting of wire gauze
portion]
5 Fully glazed or gauzed doors, ..do.. 0.80 (for each side)
windows etc. (excluding painting or
wire gauze portion)
6 Fully venetioned or louvered doors, ..do.. 1.80 (for painting all
windows etc over)
7 Trellis (or jalli work one way or two Measured flat overall, on 2 (for painting all
ways) deduction shall be made over)
for open spaces,
supporting members
shall not be measured
separately
8 Carved or enriched work Measured flat 2 (for each side)
9 Whether boarding Measured flat (not 1.20 (for each)
girthed support
measured separately)
10 Wood shingle roofing Measured flat (not 1.10 (for each)
girthed)
11 Boarding with cover fillets and Measured flat (not 1.05 (for each side)
match boarding girthed)
12 Tile and slate battening Measured flat overall no 0.80 (for painting
deductions shall be made all over)
for open spaces
II - STEEL WORK DOORS, WINDOWS
ETC
13 Plain sheeted steel doors or Measured flat (not 1.10 (for each)
windows edges etc girthed) including frame

14 Fully glazed or gauzed doors and ..do.. 0.50 (for each side)
windows (excluding painting of wire
gauze portion)
15 Partly paneled and partly glazed or …do.. 0.80 (for each side)
gauzed doors & windows (excluding
painting of wire gauze portion)
16 Corrugated sheeted steel doors or ..do.. 1.25 (for each side)
windows
17 Collapsible gates Measured flat 1.50 (for painting all
over)
18 Rolling shutter of interlocked laths Measured flat (size of 1.10 (for each side)
opening) all over jamb,
bottom rails and locking
arrangements etc. shall be
included in the item (top
cover shall be measured
separately)
III – GENERAL
19 Expanded metal, hard drawn steel Measured flat overall, on 1.00 (for paint all
wire fabric of approved quality, grill deduction shall be made over)
works and gratings in guard Bars, for open spaces,
balustrades, railing partitions and supporting members
MS Bars in windows frames shall not be measured
separately
20 Open palisage fencing & gates ..do.. 1.00 (for paint all
including standards, braces , rails over)
strays etc in timber of steel
21 Corrugated iron sheeting in roofs, ..do.. 1.14 (for each side)
side cladding etc
22 AC corrugated sheeting in roofs, ..do.. 1.20 (for each side)
side cladding etc
23 AC corrugated sheeting in roofs, ..do.. 1.10 (for each side)
side cladding etc of Nainital pattern
using plain sheets
24 Wire gauze shutters including ..do.. 1.10 (for each side)
painting of wire gauze
 (B) BUILDING WORK
a. Building Material
b. Foundation
c. Masonary work
d. Cement Concrete Work
e. Other items
BUILDING MATERIALS
1. CEMENT
2. IME
3. BRICKS
4. SAND
5. AGGREGATE
6. WATER
7. NATURAL STONE
8. OTHER MATERIAL
9. MILD STEEL
10. SANITARY ARTICLES
11. ELECTRICAL ARTICLES
12. SBC OF SOME ROCK & SOIL
13. P.C PIPES
FREQUENCIES OF TESTING SAMPLES
For testing building materials, following samples are to be sent to the
Central Regional Laboratory before work starts, if testing facilities are
not available at work site.
Materials Sample to be test
1. Cement 1 per lot of 20-50 tonnes
2. Lime 1 per source
3. Bricks 1 set(5) Per 6000-10000
4. Sand 1 per lot of 30-35 tons
5. Water 1 per source
6. Aggregate 1 per source
7. M.S.Bar 1 per lot of 20-50 tons
8. Stone 1 per source
9. Sanitary articles Each item
10. Electrical Items Each item
11. Other items As required
 1. CEMENT
(1) TEST & REQUIREMENTS
S.No Tests Requirements
1. Setting Time
Initial (I.S.T) : Min 30 minutes
Final (F.S.T) : Max 600 minutes
2. Compressive strength Kg/cm2
Grades days
3 7 28
(i) 33 Grade 160 220 330
(ii) 43 Grade 230 330 430
(iii) 53 Grade 270 370 530
(ii) TYPE OF CEMENT
Mainly five types available
1. Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)
33 grade (IS 269)
2 Rapid Hardening Portland Cement
3. O.P.C 43 Grade (IS 8112)
4. O.P.C 53 grade (IS 12589)
5. Sulphate Resistant Portland Cement (IS 12330)
.LIME
(1) TEST & REQUIREMENTS

Tests Requirements
Types of limes
A B C D E
1. Compressive 28.8 17.5 - - 17.5
strength Kg/cm2
2 % CaO & MgO 60 70 85 85 25
 TYPES OF LIMES
There are five class of limes:
1. Class A Hydraulic lime
2. Class B Semi hydraulic lime
3. Class C Fat lime
4. Class D Magnesium Lime
5. Class E Kankar Lime
The class A is used for structural purposes, class B & E for masonary
and class C & D are used for plaster and white washing

2. BRICKS (IS 1077/86)

(i) TEST & REQUIREMENTS

Test Requirements
1 WA Compressive strength 20 max % strength
2 Class Min Kg/cm2 Max Kg/cm2
1 35 350 400
2 30 300 350
3 25 250 300
4 20 200 250
5 17.5 175 200
6 15 150 175
7 12.5 125 150
8 10 100 125
9 7.5 75 100
10 5.0 50 75
11 3.5 25 50
Visual examination
The Bricks shall be free from cracks, and flaws and modules of free
lime, having smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners, and emit a
clear ringing sound often struck.

4. SAND (FINE AGGREGATE)

 GRADING OF SAND FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Sieve % passing
Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III
10mm 100 100 100
4.75mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
2.36m 60-95 75-100 85-100
1.18mm 30-70 55-90 75-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79
300 micron 0-20 6-30 12-40
150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10

The fineness modulas : Min 2 max. 3.5

TABLE GRADING REQUIREMENT FOR SAND

Sieve % passing
Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III
4.75mm 100 90-100 95-100
2.36m 90-100 60-95 95-100
1.18mm 70-100 30-70 90-100
600 micron 40-100 15-34 80-100
300 micron 5-70 5-20 20-65
150 micron 0-15 0-10 0-15
5. COARSE AGGREGATE (CONCRETE)
(I) TEST & FREQUENCY

Test Requirement
1 Impact value Max 40%
2 Flakiness index Max 35%
3 Crushing value Max 30%
 TABLE 1000-1 GRADING REQUIREMENT

Sieve % passing
40 mm 20m 12.5mm
80mm 100 - -
40mm 95-100 100 -
20mm 30-70 95-100 100
12.5mm - - 92-100
10.0mm 10-35 25-55 40-85
4.75mm 0-5 0-10 0-10
f. WATER
Potable water is generally satisfactory for mixing concrete Mixing
and curing with sea water shall not be permitted
(i) Test & Requirements

Test Frequency
1 To neutralize 200 ml of water Max 2 ml of 0.1 N NaOH
using phenolphthalein as an required
indicator
2 To neutralize 200 ml of water Max. 10ml of 0.1 N
using methyl orange as an HCL required
indicator
3 Permissible Solid Max %
1 Organic 200 mg/Ltr
2 Inorganic 3000 mg/Ltr
3 Sulphate (SO4) 500 mg/Ltr
4 Chloride (Cl) 500 mg/Ltr
5 Suspended matter 2000 mg/Ltr
4 The p H Value Min 6
7- STONES
The water absorption : Max 5%
The length of stones shall not exceed 3 times its height, not shall then
twice its height plus one joint. No stone shall be less in width than the
height and width on the basis shall not be greater than three – fourth
of the thickness of the wall nor less than 105 mm.

8 OTHER MATERIALS
1. Cement tiles
i. Water absorption Max 10%
ii. Abrasion (individual) Max 2.5%
(Average)
2. White Glazed Tiles:
i. Water absorption Max 10%
3. Timber:
i. Moisture content Max 19%
4. Distemper:
i. Reside on sieve 63 micron Max 5%
ii Behaviour towards lime no colour change
iii.Drying time Max., 3 hours
9- TOLERANCE LIMIT OF STEEL
ISI Standard
Size Spec Tolerance Per Wt. Var. Inde.
Gr./m Per. Limits Gr/M Sample
as per IS % Var
Grams/m
6mm 222 - - -
8mm 395 367 to 423 56 +7
10mm 617 574 to 660 86 +7
12mm 888 844 to 932 88 +5
16mm 1580 1501 to 1659 158 +5
20mm 2470 2396 to 2544 148 +3
25mm 3850 3735 to 3995 230 +3
28mm 4830 4886 to 4975 290 +3

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
(FE 415) GRADE
TEST ISI STANDARD
0.2% Proof Stress 415.0 /mm2
Tensile Strength 45 N/mm2 (Min)
% age Elongation 14.5% (Min)
Bend Test Upto Incl. 22mm 3d
Over 22mm 4d
Rebend Test Upto Incl. 10mm 5d
Over 22mm 6d

10. SANITARY ARTICLES

Following information of each article should be recorded in a
register
Type of material Type of test
1. Appliances, Fixture material make, ISI
& fittings marking, size, class or type
2. Pipes: (GI, SW, CI, AC Material Make ISI Class, Weight
Pressure, non-pressure W.A
3. Man Holes Material, Make ISI, Size, Weight
4. Pipe Fixtures & fittings Laying % jointing of pipes, fixing
& erection, Qyt. Of lead in
Kg/Joint,
Quality of hemp

11. ELECTRICAL ARTICLES

Following information of each articles should be recorded in register

Type of Type of test

material (Where applicable)
1 Batten, casting 1 Material
& capping 2 Size, width,
2 Conduit thickness
3 Wire, Cable 3 Anti termite
Conductor Treatment
4 Board, Blocks/Box 4 Varnishes /paints
5 Earthing 5 Diameter
6 Poles 6 Gauge
7 Stay rods 7 Manufacturer
8 Insulators 8 ISI marking
9 Fixing: button, 9 Insulation
Casting/conduits 10 Meggar
10 Fixtures: switches Testing
Brackets, shade, tube Resistance
11 Light fixture, choke, 11 Earth
Control panels Testing
12 Internal, external 12 Heights
Lightening conductor 13 Quality
14 Dimensions
12- QUALITY CONTROL TEST &
REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

S.No Test Requirements

EARTHING
Earth Electrode Resistance 5 ohms
TESTING OF INSTALLATION
i. Insulation resistance test
a. Insulation resistance of whole
system of conductors
to earth
Not less than 50 ohms
No of outlets
b.insulation resistance between
phase conductor & neutral m. ohms
c. insulation between conductor &
conductor m. ohms
POLARITY TEST OF SWITCHES
EARTH CONDUCTIVITY TEST
EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE
TEST
a. for cable work
i. insulation between conductor
& conductor 25m. ohms
ii. insulation between conductor and No of outlets
earth 25m. ohms
iii. insulation between phase No of outlets
conductor & neutral
LIGHTENING PROTECTION
SYSTEM
a. Resistance of whole lighting system
to earth electrode 10 ohms

FOUNDATION
TESTS & FREQUENCIES

S.No Test Requirements

1 Safe bearing capacity (SBC) by plate 1. test for each building costing
load test more than 1 lac
2 Investigation test to improve SBC by When S.B.C is less than 10
treatment tonne per sq.m

3 Compressive strength of concrete 1 Set per day

Compressive strength of Lime Concrete (40 to 100) : 10 Kg/cm2

Compressive strength of Cement
Concrete of Grade : As required
&
(1) S.B.C OF SOME ROCK 7 SOIL (IS : 1256)
S.No Test Requirements
1 Hard rock without lamination 330

2 Lamination rock like lime/sand stone 185

Soft rock
3
Dence & non cohesive
(i)
Compacted grave/sand gravel
a. 45
Compacted coarse medium sand
b. 25
Loose dry fine sand & silt

c. Cohessive Soil: 10-15

(ii) Medium Clay type

a. Black cotton soil 10 to 15

b. Less than 10
MASONARY WORK
1. GRADES OF MORTAR
According to their compressive strength there are many grade of lime mortar or
composite mortar. Different grades are give is IS 2250. Some of them are
mentioned below:

Grade Mix Compressive

CEMENT LIME SAND
1 M 0.5 0 1 (B/E)
2 M 0.7 1 0
3 M1.5 1 0
0 1(A)
4 M2.0 1 2
0 1(A)
strength Kg/cm2
3 5 to 7
8 7 to 15
7 15 to 20
3
9 20 to 30
2
5 M 3.0 1 0 6 30 to 50
0 1(A) 1
6 M 5.0 1 0 5 50 to 75
1 0.25 4
7 M 7.5 1 0 4 75 & more
1 0.25 3
1 0 3
2. STRENGTH DEVELOPMENT

Age : days 7 14 28 60 80

% strength 50 75 100 120 130

3. EFFECT OF MECHANICAL GRINDING

Strength Strength after grinding

w/o grinding 5 mins 15 mins 30 mins

10 Kg/cm2 24.2 29.2 30.0

8.5 Kg/cm2
6.5 Kg/cm2 21.7 25.3 25.7

10.1 12.5 14.0

In case CEMENT MORTAR the mixing shall be done in a mechanical unused for
more than 30 minutes shall be rejected and removed from site of work

CEMENT CONCRETE

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

Grade Mix Compressive

strength min
Kg/cm2
Cement Sand Metal
1 M 7.5 1 4 8 75
2 M10 1 3 6 100
3 M15 1 2 4 150
4 M20 1 1.5 3 200
5 M25 1 1 2 250
6 M30 1 1 1 300

STRENGTH DEVELOPMENT

Age : days 7 14 28 60 80

% strength 60 77.5 90 100 110

Age : days 86 110 252 365

 % strength 120 125 140 146.5

OTHER ITEMS – JOINTS

(1) Brick Masonary

The thickness of joints shall not exceed 10 mm. all joints on exposed face shall be
tooled to give concave finish.

(2) Stone Masonary

In case Radom masonry. The face joints shall not be more than 20 mm
thick and in case Square Rubble, the face joints shall not be more than 10mm thick,
but shall be sufficiently thick to prevent stone - stone contact and shall be
completely filed with mortar.

In case of Ashlar Masonary, all joints shall be full of mortar. These shall
not be less than 3 mm thick. Face joints shall be uniform of throught, and a
uniform recess of 20 mm depth from face shall be left with the help of a stone plate
during the progress work.

GENERAL
1. Equipments needed for field Lab.
2. Identification Test Checking & Linking of payment with result.
3. Conversion of units
4. Record & Registers with j. En.
5. Information with A. En. & j. En.
6. Circulr regarding Biumen
7. Q.P – 2 & Q.P – 4
8. PMC – Calculations
9. Preventing and removal of enerochment on land

1. EQUIPMENTS NEEDED FOR FIELD LAB

1) Set of G.l. Sieves with lid and pan, 450 mm diameter of size 125, 90, 63, 53,
45, 22.4, 13.2, 11.2, 5.6 and 4.75 mm.
2) Set of Brass Sieves with lid and pan, 200 mm diameter of size 2.8, 2.36, 1.18
mm, 710, 600, 355, 300, 180, 150, 90, and 75 micron.
3) Self indicating balance of 10 kg capacity of accuracy 0.1 gm.
4) Themometers up to 360 deg. C.
5) Cube moulds of size 15x15x15 cm and of size 5x5x5 cm 12 No each.
6) Gas/Kerosene stove/Hot plate.
7) Moisture Containers 24 Nos.
8) For, field density, core cutter and send Replacement.
9) Rapid Moisture meter.
10) Flakiness index Gauge.
11) Centrifuge Bitument Extraction.
12) 3 meter Straight Edge and wedge with Camber Board.
13) Slump Test Equipment.
14) Load Frame of 5 Ton capacity.
15) Benzene min 10 liters at site.

IDENTIFICATION OF WORK FOR Q.C

A list of works in progress will be identified by Addl. C.E of zone for

the building Costing 7.5 lacs and for road costing 15 lacs or above. All
required Q.C tests are to be conducted by field staff.

TEST CHECKING
(1) Supdt. Engineer 1%
(2) Executive Engineer (Q.C) 5%
(3) Executive Engineer : 5%
(4) Assistant Engineer 10%
(5) Junior Engineer 10%

Copy of Schedule of the works will be sent to Ex. En. QC by Ex. En site when work
order is given.

LINKING OF PAYMENT
Every running bill is to be linked with test results and no payment is to be given
without test results. Copy of test results should be enclosed with bill.

Conversion units
IN = 0.101971 Kg
IKN = 101.971 Kg
1N/mm2 = 10.197 Kg/cm2
Pa = 1 N/m2
1 Mpa = 106 N/m2 = 10 bar = 10.197 Kg/cm2

RECORDS & REGISTER WITH J.En

(1) Tape 30 m Testing equipments

(2) Q.C registers of observations, test results & test checking & inspection Book
(3) Stock register of Lab. Equipment
(4) List of works in progress and their progress chart & Bar Chart
(5) Sanctioned estimates, G. Schedule
(6) Map of his jurisdiction

QUALITY

CONTROL

TEST FREQUENCIES
 & SPECIFICATIONS

OF

ROAD AND BUILDING

PREFACE

The Quality Control in our construction technique means a

methodical effort made to achieve a certain degree of excellence by all checks and
tests made to produce, determine and obtain satisfactory quality and durability as
per standard specification.
To achieve our aims of Quality Control we have to adhere to the
following aspects in our construction activity:
1. Use of standard material.
2. Use of better workmanship
3. Use of improved technique
4. Adherence to specification, and
5. Exercise of affective supervision, timely testing of materials and
rectification for better results.
To know the specifications for the tests required to be conducted and
their frequencies is prepared for all Engineers.
(A) ROAD WORK
I. Earth Work
II. Sub Base & Base Course
III. Bituminous Curse
IV. Surface.
A) EARTH WORK
I. Tests and Frequencies
 II. Compaction requirement
III Type of Soil

CONTROL TEST & FREQUENCIES

(BORROW MATERIALS)

Tests Frequencies
1. Plasticity 2 Tests/8000 Cub. M,
2. Lab Density -do-
3. Sand Content -do-
4. Lab C.B.R. 1 Test/3000 Cub. M.
5. Moisture Content 1 Test/250 Cub. M.
6. Field Density (Compaction) 1 Test/500-1000 Sqm

EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
TABLE 300-2 COMPACTION REQUIREMENT FOR
EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE

Type of work/material % Compaction

1. Subgrade and earthen shoulders Min 97%
2. Embankment Min 95%
3. Expansive clyas
4. Subgrade and 500 mm portion just Not allowed
below the subgrade
5. Remaining portion of embankment Min 90%
 TYPE OF SOIL
Classification of Excavated Material

Classification: All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the

Engineer in the following manner.
(a). Soil : This shall comprise top soil, turf, sand, silt loam, clay, mud, peat,
black cotton soil, soft shale or loose moorum, a mixture of these and similar
material which yields to the ordinary application of pick spade and/or
shovel, rake or other ordinary digging implement, Removal of gravel or
any other nodular material having dimension in any one direction not
exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata shall be deemed to be covered
under this category.
(b). Ordinary Rock (not requiring blasting) this shall include:
(i) Rock types such as laterities, shales, and conglomerates, vaneties of
limestone and sandstone etc. Which may be quarried or split with crow
bars, also including any rock which in dry state may be hard, requiring
blasting but which, when wet becomes soft and manageable by means
other than blasting.
(ii). Macadam surface such as water bound and bitumen, tarbound, soling of
roads, paths etc. and hard core, compact moorun or stabilized soil requiring
grafting too or pick or both and shovel, closely applied, gravel and cobbled
stone having maximum dimension in any one direction between 75 and 300
mm.
(iii). Lime Concrete, stone masonry in lime mortar and brick work in
lime/cement mortar below ground level, reinforced cement concrete which
may be brokenup with crow bars or picks and stone masonry in cement
mortar below ground level and
(iv). Boulders which do not require blasting having maximum dimension in any
direction more than 300 mm, found lying loose on the surface or embedded
in river bed, soil, talus, slope wash and terrace material of dissimilar origin.
(c) Hard Rock (requiring blasting)
This shall comprise-
Any rock or cement concrete for the excavation of which the use of
mechanical pland and or blasting is required. Reinforced cement concrete
(reinforcement cut through but not separated from the concrete) below ground
level and .
Boulders requiring blasting
Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited)
Hard rock requiring blasting as described under (c) but where blasting is
prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling,
wedging or any other agreed method.

Marshy Soil
This shall include soils like soft clays and peats excavated below the original
ground level of marshes and swamps and soils excavated from other areas
requiring continuous pumping or bailing out of water.

DENSITY REQUIREMENT OF EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE

MATERIALS

S.No Type of Work Maximum laboratory dry unit weight

when tested as per IS2720 (Part 8)
1 Embankment upto 3 meters height, Not less than 15.2 kN/cu.m
not subjected to extensive flooding
2 Embankments exceeding 3 meters Not less than 16.0 kN/cu.m
height or embankments of any height
subject to long periods of inundation
3 Subgrade and earthen Not less than 17.5 kN/cu.m
shoulders/verges/backfill
Note :
1. This table is not applicable for light weight fill material e.g cinder, fly ash etc.
2. The Engineer may relax these requirements at his discretion taking into account
the availability of material for construction and other relevant factors
3. The material to be used in sub grade should also satisfy design CBR at the dry
unit weight applicable as per table 300-2
II. SUB – BASES & BASES
(NON BITUMINOUS)
1. Granular Sub-Base
2. Water Bound Mcadam (WBM)
3. Wet Mix Mcadam (WMM)
4. Crusher – Run Macadam Base
(1) GRANULAR SUB - BASE
TEST AND FREQUENCY
Tests Frequencies
1 Gradation 1 Test / 200m2
2. Atterberg limits ..do..
3. Moisture content prior to compaction 1 Test / 500 m2
4. Density of compacted layer 1 Test / 500m2
5. Deleterious constituents As required
6. Lab C.B.R As required
1. Materials : Natural sand, gravel, morrium, crushed stone of combination
thereof as per grading required
GRADING FOR CLOSED-GRADED
GRANULAR SUB-BASE MATERIALS
IS SIEVE Designation % by weight passing the IS SIEVE
Grade I Grade II Grade III

75.0 mm 100 - -
53.0 mm 80-100 100 -
26.5 mm 55-90 70-100 100
9.5 mm 35-85 50-80 65-95
4.75 mm 25-55 40-65 50-80
2.36 mm 20-40 30-50 40-65
0.425 mm 10-25 15-25 20-35
0.075 mm 3-10 3-10 3-10
Note: The material passing 0.425 mm sieve shall have liquid limit and
plasticity index not more than 25 and 6% respectively.

GRADING FOR COURSE GRADED

GRANULAR SUB-BASE MATERIALS
IS SIEVE % by weight passing the IS SIEVE
Designation Grade I Grade II Grade III
75.0 mm 100 - -
53.0 mm - 100 -
26.5 mm 55-75 50-80 100
4.75 mm 10-30 15-35 25-45
0.075 mm <10 <10 <10
ROLING FOR COMPACTION
If the thickness of the compacted layer does not exceed 100 mm, a
smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be used.
If compacted single layer upto 225 mm then a vibratory roller of min
80 to 100 kN static weight with plain drum or heavy pneumatic roller of min 200
to 300 kN weight and min tyre pressure of 0.7 MN/m2 is required.
Speed of roller : max 5 Km/hour
WATER BOUND MACADAM
TEST AND FREQUENCIESS
Tests Frequencies
1. Agg. Impact 1 Test / 200 m3
2. Grading 1 Test / 100 m3
3. F.I & E.I 1 Test / 200 m3
4. Atterberg limit of BM 1 Test / 25 m3
5. Water Absorption 1 Test / Source
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT OF
COARSE AGGREGATE FOR WBM

Test Frequencies
1. Impact Value Max. 30%
2. Combined Fskiness and Elongation Index Max 30%
3. Water Absorption Max 2%

BINDING MATERIAL
It is used for WBM as a filler material meant for preventing raveling, having
a plasticity Index (PI) value of less than 6.
The quantity of binding material will depend on the type of Screenings.
Generally for 75 mm compacted thickness of WBM will be 0.06 – 0.09
m3/10m2 and 0.08 – 0.10m3/10m2 for 100mm compacted thickness.
B.M may not be necessary when the screening used area of crushable types
as gravel or moorum
 GRADING FOR COURSE GRADED
GRANULAR SUB-BASE MATERIALS

Gr. No Size Range Sieve % passing by

weight
1 90 mm to 45 mm 125mm 100
90mm 90-100
63mm 25-60
45mm 0-15
22.4mm 0-5
2 63 mm to 45 mm 90mm 100
63mm 90-100
53mm 25-75
45mm 0-15
22.4mm 0-5
3 53 mm to 22.4 mm 63mm 100
53mm 95-100
45mm 65-90
22.4mm 0-10
11.2mm 0-5
Note : The compacted thickness for a layer with Grading 1 shall be 100 mm thick
while for layer with other grading i.e., 2 & 3 it shall be 75 mm.
GRADING FOR SCREENINGS
Gr. No Size Range Sieve % passing by
weight
A 13.2 mm 13.2mm 100
11.2mm 95-100
5.6mm 15-35
180 micron 0-10
B 11.2 mm 11.2mm 100
5.6mm 90-100
180 micron 15-35
Generally screening consists of the same material as the coarse aggregate.
Moorum or Gravel may be used for this purpose provided liquid and plastic index
should be below 20 and 6 respectively and fraction passing 75 micron sieve does
not exceed 10%.
The use of screening shall be omitted in case of soft aggregate such as brick, metal,
kankar, laterites etc.
APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES OF COARSE AGGREGATE &
SCREENINGS REQUIRED FOR COMPACTED THICKNESS OF
100/75MM OF WBM FOR 10 sq.m AREA
Gr & Size Compacted Loose Qty Screenings
thickness
Stone Screening Crushable
Moorum or
Gra. Type Loose Qty loose gravel
& Size Qty
Grading 1 100 mm 1.21 to A 0.27 to 0.30 to 0.32m3
90-45 mm 1.43m 3
13.2 mm 0.30m 3

Grading 2 75mm 0.91 to A 0.27 to 0.22 to

63 to 1.07m 3
13.2 mm 0.30m 3
0.24m3
45 mm
..do.. 75mm ..do. A 0.27 to ..do..
11.2 mm 0.30m 3

Grading 3 75mm ..do.. A 0.27 to ..do..

53 to 11.2 mm 0.30m 3

22.4 mm

(3) WET MIX MACADAM

TEST AND FREQUENCIES
TESTS FREQUENCIES
1. Agg. Impact 1 Test / 200m3
2. Grading 1 Test / 100m3
1. FI & E.I 1 Test / 200m3
1. Atterberg limit of passing 425 u 1 Test / 100m3
1. Density of compacted layer 1 Test / 500m3
WMM is same as for WBM
GRADING REQUIREMENT OF
AGGREGATES FOR WMM
 IS Sieves % Passing by weight
53.00 mm 100
45.00 mm 95-100
26.50 mm -
22.40 mm 60-80
11.20 mm 40-60
4.75 mm 25-40
2.36 mm 15-30
600 micron 8-22
75 micron 0-8

Material finer than 425 micron shall have Plasticity Index (PI) max. 6
ROLLING FOR COMPACTION
Same as in case of Granular Subase
CRUSHER – RUN MACADAM BASE
Material : Crushed rock should used. If Crushed gravels/shigle is used, not
less than 90% pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two
fractured faces confirming the requirement
AGGREGATE GRADING
Sieves Size % passing by weight 37.5mm
Max. size 53 mm
63mm 100 -
45mm 57-100 100
22.4mm 50-65 90-100
5.6mm 25-45 35-55
7.10 micron 10-25 10-30
90 micron 2-9 2-9
TABLE 400-13 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Impact Value : Max 30%
2. Combined F.I & E.I (Total) : Max 30%
3. Water Absorption : Max 2%
4. LL & PI (passing 425 mic) : Max 25 & 6
Soundness test shall be carried out as per IS 2386 (pt 5)
 III BITUMINOUS BASES
& SURFACE COURSE
(1) Prime Coat over Granular Base
(2) Tack Coat
(3) Bituminous Macadam
(4) Dense Bituminous Macadam
(5) Bituminous Penetration Macadam
(6) Built up Spray – Grout
(7) Surface dressing
(8) Open Graded P.M.C
(9) Mix. Seal Surfacing (MSS)
(10) Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete
(11) Bituminous Concrete
(12) Bitumen Mastic
(13) Seal Coat
TEST & FREQUENCY
(a) For Prime Coat/Track Coat
Tests Frequencies
1. Quality of Binder 2 Sample/lot
2. Binder Temperature Regularly
3. Rate of spread of Binder 1 Test/500m3 & min
2 Test/day

(b) GEN FOR OTHER BITUMINOUS WORKS:

(Seal Coat, Surface Dressing, PMC, MSS, Bituminous macadam, DBM,
SDBC)
Tests Frequencies
1 Quality of Binder : 2 Tests/ lot
2. Impact value : 1 test / 50m3
3. Flakiness index & elongation index : ..do.
4. Stripping value : 1 test / source
5. Water absorption : ..do..
6. Gradation of Agg. : 1 tests / 25m3
7. Temp.. of Binder : Regularly
8. Rate of spread of materials : Regularly
9. Binder Content : 1 test 500m3 min
2 tests/day

(1) PRIME COAT OVER GRANULAR BASE

Three types of surface are :
1 Low porosity : WMM & WBM
2. Medium porosity : Stabilized Base
3. High porosity : Gravel Base
VISCOSITY REQUIREMENT AND
QUANTITY OF BITUMINOUS PRIMER
Type of Surface Kinetic viscosity at Quantity per
600 (Centistokes) 10 Sq.m Kg
Low Viscosity 30-60 6 to 9
Medium Viscosity 70-140 9 to12
High Viscosity 250-500 12 to 15

TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENT
MC-30 MC-70 MC-250 Bituminous
(Degree cent.) Emulsion
30-55 50-80 75-100 20-60
(2) TACK COAT
TEMPERATURE
The normal range of spraying temperature shall be for a bituminous emulsion
shall be 200C to 700 C and for a cutback 500 to 800 C if RC-70/MC-70 grade is used
RATE OF APPLICATION OF TACK COAT
Type of Surface Quantity of Liquid
Bituminous material
In Kg/10m2
1. Normal bituminous surface 2.0 to 2.5
2. Dry and hungry bituminous surface 2.5 to 3.00
3. Granular surface treated with primer 2.5 to 3.0
4. Non bituminous surface
(a) Granular base (not primed) 3.5 to 4.0
(b) Cement Concrete pavement 3 to 3.5
There is no need to apply a tack coat on a freshly laid bituminous course is
overlaid the same day without opening it to traffic

SELECTION OF THE GRADE OF BITUMEN

A. For Bituminous Premix Carpet:
Grade Temp. Diff Traffic Int.
30/40 > 250 C > 1500 CV/ day
50/60 ..do.. < 1500 CV/ day
50/60 < 250 C > 1500 CV/ day
80/100 ..do.. < 1500 CV/ day
30/40 ..do.. > 4500 CV/ day
80/100 High altitude & snow region
B. For Bituminous Macadam:
30/40 Grade: For hot climate
60/470 or 80100 : For other climate

C. For dense graded bituminous concrete

60/70 : For heavier wheel load and for large repetition of wheel load.
D. A more viscous grade of bitumen is advantageous in reducing stripping of
bitumen film from aggregate in presence of water.

(3) BITUMINOUS MACADAM

Tests & Frequencies:
i. All general tests:
ii. Marshall test : 1 test / 400 tonnes
iii.Density of compacted layer: 1 test/250m2
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF AGGREGATES
S.No Tests Requirement
1. Impact value Max 30%
2. F.I & E.I Max 30%
3. Coating & stripping of Bitumen Agg. Mix Max 95%
4. Soundness:
i. Loss with sodium sulphate 5 cycles Max 12%
ii. Loss with magnesium sulphate 5 cycles Max 18%
5. Water absorption Max 2%
6. Cleanliness Max 5% passing
0.075mm sieve
Water sensitivity test in only to be carried and
If the minimum retained coating in the stripping
Test is less than 95%
7. Water sensitivity Max 80%
 COMPOSITION OF BITUMINOUS MACADAM

MIX Designation Grading-1 Grading-II

Nominal Size layer thickness 40mm 19mm
80-100mm 50-75mm
I.S Sieve Cumulative % by
Weight Passing
Grading–I Grading-II
45.0 mm 100 -
37.5mm 90-100 -
26.5mm 75-100 100
19.0mm - 90-100
13.2mm 35-61 56-55
4.75mm 13-22 16-36
2.36mm 4-19 4-19
0.3mm 2-10 2-10
0.075mm 0-5 0-8
Bitumen content % by weight of
Total mixture 3.1-3.4 3.3-3.5
Bitumen Grade 35-90 35 to 50
Note: Appropriate bitumen contents for conditions in cooler areas of India may be
up to 0.5% higher subject to the approval of the Engineer.

COMPACTION
i. Initial rolling with 80-100mKn static weight smooth wheel roller (3 wheels
or Tandem)
ii. Intermediate rolling with vibratory roller of 80-100 KN static weight or
pneumatic typed roller of 150-250 KN weight, with min 7 wheels & tyre
pressure 0.7MP
iii. The final rolling with 60-80 KN tandem roller. The joints and edges shall be
rolled with 80-100 KN Static roller.
iv. The rolling shall then be continued till the entire surface has been rolled to
95% of lab density, obtained from Marshall test.
 iv. Rolling operation shall be completed in every respect before the temp.. of
the mix, falls below specified range for various grade of bitumen as
mentioned in table 500-5

Bitumen Bt. Mixing Aggregate Mixed Rolling Laying

Penetration (0C) mixing Material (0C) (0C)
(0C) (0C)
35 160-170 160-175 170 Max. 100 Min. 130 Min.
65 150-185 150-170 165 Max. 90 Minn. 125 Min.
90 140-160 140-165 155 Max. 80 Min 115 Min

BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM

TESTS AND FREQUENCIES
Tests Frequencies
1. Quality of Binder 2 tests / lot
2. Impact value 1 test / 200m3
3. Flakiness index & elongation index ..do..
4. Stripping value 1 test / source
5. Water absorption ..do..
6. Gradation of Agg.. 1 test / 100m3
7. Temp.. of Binder Regularly
8. Rate of spread of binder 1 test / 500m3
COMPOSITIION OF PENETRATION MACADAM
I.S Sieve Designation Comulative % by weight of total agg. Passing
(mm) For 50mm compacted For 75mm compacted
thickness thickness
Coarse Agg. Key Agg. Coarse Key Agg.
Agg.
63mm - - 100 -
45mm 100 - 58-82 -
26.5mm 37-72 - - 100
22.4mm - 100 5-27 50-75
13.2mm 2-20 50-75 - -
11.2mm - - - 5-25
5.6mm - 5-25 - -
2.8mm 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5
Approx. loose agg. 0.06 0.015 0.09 0.018
Quantities cu.m/m2
Binder quantity
(penetration grade) Kg/m2 5 6.8
Physical requirements: Same as

Rolling: It should be done by 8-100 tonnes smooth wheeled steel roller. The
surface shall be checked with crown template and a 3 metre straight edge. The
surface shall not vary more than 10mm from the template or straight edge.
At the time of applying the binder, the aggregate shall be surface dry for full
depth of layer.
Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests
The water sensitivity test is only required if the min. retained coating the stripping
test is less than 95%

GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL FILLER

IS Sieves (MM) Cumulative % passing
By weight of total aggregate
0.6 100
0.3 95-100
0.075 85-100
The filler shall be free from organic impurities and have a plasticity index not
greater than 4. The plasticity index requirement shall not apply if filler is cement
or lime. When the coarse aggregate is gravel, 2 percent by weight of total
aggregate, shall be Portland cement or hydrated lime and % of fine aggregate
reduced accordingly. Cement or hydrated lime is not required when the limestone
aggregate is used. Where the aggregates falls to meet the requirements of the
water sensitivity test in table 500-8, then 2 percent by total weight of aggregate, of
hydrated lime shall be added without additional cost.
DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS MACADAM
TEST & FREQUENCIES
i. All general tests:

ii. Marshall test: 1 test/400 tons

iii. Density of compacted layer 2 tests/250m2

MATERIALS: Physical requirement of aggregate will be same as in B.M

 AGGREGATE GRADING
Sieve Size Layer thickness
80-100 50-75
45.0mm 100 -
37.5mm 95-100 100
28.5mm 63-83 90-100
19.0mm - 71-95
13.2mm 55-75 56-65
9.5mm - -
4.75mm 38-54 38-54
2.36mm 28-42 28-42
1.18mm - -
0.6mm - -
0.3mm 7-21 7-21
0.15mm - -
0.075mm 2-8 2-8
Bitumen content % by
Mass of total Mix2 Min 40 Min. 40
Bitumen grade (Pen) 60 or 90 65 or

Notes: i. The combined aggregate grading shall not vary for the low limit on
one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve.
ii. Determined by the Marshall method

REQUIREMENT FOR DENSE

GRADED BITUMENAN MACADAM
Min. stability (kN at 600C) 9.0
Min flow (mm) 2
Max flow 9mm 4
Compaction level 75 blow on each of
the
(Number of blow) two faces of the
specimen
Percent voids 3-6
Percent of voids in minerals See table 500-12
aggregate (VMA)
Percent voids filled with bitumen (VFB) 65-75
507.3.3 JOBB MIX FORMULA: The contractor shall inform the Engineer in
writing, at least 20 days before the start of the work, of the job formula proposed
for use in the works, and shall give the following details:

i. Source and location of materials

ii. Proportions of all material expressed as follows where each is applicable
a. Binder type and percentage by weight of total mixture.
b. Coarse aggregate Fine aggregate/ Mineral Filler as percentage by weight
of total aggregate including mineral filler.
iii. A single definite percentage passing each sieves for the mixed aggregate.
iv. The individual grading of the individual aggregate fractions and the
proportions of each in the combined grading.
v. The results of tests enumerated in Table 500-11 as obtained by the
contractor.
vi. Where the mixer is a batch mixer, the individual weight of each type of
aggregate and binder per batch.
vii. Tests results of physical characteristics of aggregates as to be used.
viii. Mixing temperature and compacting temperatu
While establishing the job mix formula, the contractor shall ensure that it is
used on a correct and truly representative sample of the materials that will
actually be used in the work and that the mixture and its different ingradients
satisfy the physical and strength requirement of these specifications.
Approval of the job mix formula shall be based on the independent testing
by the engineer for which samples of all ingradients of the mix shall be furnished
by the contractor as required by the engineer.
The approval job mix formula shall remain effective unless and until a
revised job mix formula is approved. Should a change in source of materials be
proposed, a new job mix formula shall be forwarded to the engineer for approval
before the placing of the material.
The requirements for minimum percent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA)

MINIMUM PERCENT VOIDS IN

MINERAL AGGREGATE (VMA)

Nominal Max. Min. VMA Percent

Particle Size (mm) Related to Design Air Voids, percent
3.0 4.0 5.0
9.5 14.0 15.0 16.0
12.5 13.0 14.0 15.0
19.0 12.0 13.0 19.0
25.0 11.0 12.0 13.0
37.5 10.0 11.0 12.0

Notes :
1. The nominal maximum particle size is one size larger than the first sieve
to retain more than 10 percent.
2. Interpolate minimum voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) for design
air voids values between those listed.
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS
FROM THE JOB MIX FORMULA
S.No Description Sieve % Permissible Variation
Base/Binder Wearing
Course Course
1. Aggregate Passing 19.0mm or larger +8 +7
2. Agg. Passing 13.2mm, 9.5 mm +7 +6
3. Agg. Passing 4.75mm +6 +6
4. Agg. Passing 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm +5 +4
5. Agg. Passing 0.3mm, 0.15mm +4 +3
6. Agg. Passing 0.075mm +2 +3
7. Binder Content + 0.3 + 1.5
8. Mixing Temperature + 10 C0
+ 100C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TEMPERATURE
The temperature of mix as the time of laying shall be in the range of 120 to 160 0C
and less than 1200C shall not be put in to paver spreader.
COMPACTION
Rolling same as the Bituminous macadam but density will be 98% of density
obtained from Marshall test.
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE
AGGREGATE FOR SEMI DENSE BITUMINOUS
CONCRETE PAVEMENT LAYERS
Property Test Specification
Cleanliness Grain size analysis Max 5% passing
(dust) Particle Flakiness and elongation 0.075 mm sieve
Shape index Max 30%
(Combined)
Strength* Los Angeles Max 35%
Abrasion value
Aggregate Impact value Max 27%
Durability Soundness
Sodium sulphate Max 12%
Magnesium sulphate Max 1%
Water Absorption Water absorption Max 2%
Stripping Coating and stripping of Min. retained
 bitumen aggregate
Mixtures1 Coating 95%
Water sensitivity** Retained Tensile strength 2
Min 0%
Notes: (the elongation test to be done on non-flaky aggregates in the sample)
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests
** The water sensitivity test is only required if the min. retained coating the
stripping test is less than 95%.

DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS MACADAM

TEST & FREQUENCIES
i. All general tests:
ii. Marshall test: 1 test/400 tons
iii. Density of compacted layer 2 tests/250m2
MATERIALS: The aggregate shall be satisfy except W.A max 2% Fine aggregate
and filler will be same as in Dense Bituminous Macadam

AGGREGATE GRADING
Grading I II
Nominal Agg.Size 13mm 10mm
Layer thickness 35-40mm 25-30mm
Sieve size % Passing by weight
19.0mm 100 -
13.2mm 90-100 100
9.5mm 70-90 90-100
4.75mm 35-51 35-51
2.36mm 24-39 24-39
1.18mm 15-30 15-30
0.6mm - -
0.3mm 9-19 9-19
0.15mm - -
0.075mm 3-8 3-8
BL Content % min 4.5 min 5.0
Bt grade 65 65
REQUIREMENT FOR SEMI
DENSE BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT LAYERS
S.No Description Requirement
1. Marshall stability (kNat 600C) 8.2
2. Marshall flow (mm) 2-4
3. % Air voids 3-5
4. Minimum voids in mineral aggregate (VMA)
5. % Voids in mineral agg. Filled with
Bitumen (VFB)
Job mix formula should be designed 20 days before work starts.
Permissible Variation same as in case of Dense bituminous macadam.
Temperature and rolling will also same as in case of Dense bituminous macadam.

BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
TEST & FREQUENCIES
i. All general tests:
ii. Marshall test: 1 test/400 tons
iii. Density of compacted layer 2 tests/250m2
MATERIALS: The aggregate shall be satisfy except W.A max 2% Fine aggregate
and filler will be same as in Dense Bituminous Macadam

Table 500-17 : PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE AGGREGATE FOR

BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT LAYERS
Property Test Specification
Cleanliness Grain size analysis Max 50% passing
0.075mm sieve
Particle shape Flakness and elongation index Max 30%
(combined)2
Strength Loss Angeles abrasion value Max 30%
Aggregate impact value Max 24%
Polishing Polished Stone Value Min 55%
Durability Soundness
Sodium Sulphate Max 12%
Magnesium Sulphate Max 18%
Water absorption Water absorption Max 2%
Stripping Coating and stripping of bitument Min. retained
Aggregate mixtures Coating 95%
Water Sensibility Retained Tensile strength Min 80%
 COMPOSITION OF BITUMINOUS
CONCRETE PAVEMENT LAYERS
Nominal aggregate size 19mm 13mm
Layer thickness 50-65mm 30-45mm
Sieve size % Passing
Grading-I Grading-II
45
37.5
26.5mm 100 -
19.0mm 79-100 100
13.2mm 59-79 79-100
9.5mm 52-72 70-88
4.75mm 35-55 53-71
2.36mm 28-44 42-58
1.18mm 20-34 34-48
0.6mm 15-27 26-38
0.3mm 10-20 18-28
0.15mm 5-13 12-20
0.075mm 2-8 4-10
Bt content % 5-6 5-7
Bt grade 65 65
Notes: The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit one side
of the high limit on the adjacent sieve.
1. Determined by the Marshall method.

REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS

PAVEMENT LAYERS
Min. stability (Kn AT 600c) 9.0
Min flow (mm) 2
Max. flow (mm) 4
Compaction level 75 blows on each of the two
(Number of blows) faces of the speciment
Percent of air voids 3-6
Percent voids in minerals See Table 500-12
aggregate (VMA)
Percent voids filled 55-75
with bitumen (VFB)
Loss of stability on immersion Min 75%
In water at 60 C (ASTMS D 1075)
0
retained strength
Job mix formula should be designed 20 days before work starts.
Permissible variation same as in case of Dense Bituminous Macadam
Temperature and rolling will also same as in case of Dense bituminous Macadam.
 SURFACE DRESSING
Tests & frequencies:
1. All general tests
MATERIALS:
The stone chipping shall conform except that water absorption shall be max 1%

NOMINAL RATES OF SPREAD FOR

BINDER AND CHIPPINGS
Nominal Chipping size Binder (Penetration grade Chips
mm bitumen) Kg/m2 Cum/m2
19 1.2 0.015
13 1.0 0.010
10 0.9 0.00
6 0.75 0.004
Notes:
1. These rates of spread are for pricing purposes.
2. For emulsion, these rates of spread are for the residual bitumen and
appropriate adjustment must be made to determine the total quantity.
3. Refer to Manual for Construction and Supervision of Bituminous works
for the procedure of determining the rates of spread to binder and chips.

GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR

CHIPS FOR SURFACE DRESSINGS
Sieve Designation Cumulative percent by weight of total aggregate passing for
mm the following nominal sizes (mm)
19 13 10 6
26.5 100 - - -
19.0 95-100 100 - -
13.2 0-40 85-100 100 -
9.5 0-7 0-40 85-100 100
6.3 - 0-7 0-35 85-100
4.75 - - 0-*10 -
4.35 - - - 0-35
..36 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-10
0.075 - - - 0-2
Min 95% by 0-1.5 0-1.5 0-1.5 0-1.5
weight Passing 19mm Passing Passing 9.5mm Passing
retained 13.2mm retained 6.3mm 6.3mm
13.2mm retained retained
9.5mm 3.35mm
 Table 500-22 SPRAYING TEMPERATURES FOR BINDERS
Binder grades Whirling spray jets Slot jets
Min C 0
Max C0
Min C0
Max0C
Penetration Grades
400/500
280/320 160 170 140 150
180/200 165 175 150 160
80/100 170 190 155 165
180 200 165 175
20 mm Open GRADED PREMIX CARPET TESTS & FREQUENCE:
All general tests
QUANTITIES OF MATERIAL REQURIED FOR 10 sqm OF ROAD
SURFACING FOR 20 mm THICK OPEN –GRADED PREMIX SURFACING
USING PENETRATION BITUMEN OR CUTBACK
(a) Chipps 13.2 mm (Passing 22.4 mm and 0.18 m3
retained on 11.2 mm)
(b) Chipps 11.2 mm (Passing 13.2 mm sieve 0.09 m3
and retained on 5.6 mm)
Binder for PMC
(a) For 0.18 m3 of 13.2 mm Chipps at 52 kg/m3 9.5 kg.
(b) For 0.09 m of 11.2 mm Chipps at 52 kg/m
3 3
5.1 kg.
TOTAL 14.6 kg
Temperature:
Of Binder : 150 to 163oC
Of Aggregate : 155 to 163oC
(Difference in temp. Max. 14oC)
Fix at dischange : 130 to 160oC
Tolling up to temp. : min 100oC

QUANTITES OF AGGREGATE FOR 10m2 AREA

(A) Premix Carpet
(a) Coarse aggregate nominal 132.mm size, passing IS 0.18 m3
22.4 mm sieve and retained on IS 11.2 mm sieve
(b) Coarse aggregate nominal 112.mm size, passing IS 0.09 m3
13.2 mm sieve and retained on IS 5.6 mm sieve
(B) For sale Coat:
Refer to Cause 513

QUANTITES OF EMULSION BINDER

For 10 m2 area
(A) For Premix Carpet : 20 to 23 kg.
(B) For Seal Coat :
(a) for liquid seal coat 12 to 14 kg.
(b) for premix seal coat 10 to 12 kg.
MIX SEAL SURFACING (MSS)
TEST & FREQUIENCIES:
I) All general tests
MATERIALS:
The aggregate shall be satisty as per table 500-3 except W.A. max. 1%

TABLE 500-26 AGGREGATE GRADING

IS Sieve (mm) % Passing

Type A Type B
13.2 mm - 100
11.2 mm 100 88-100
5.6 mm 52-88 31-52
2.8 mm 14-38 5-25
90 micron 0-5 0-5
Proportioning of materials: - Quantity for
1. Aggregate 0.27 cum
(For type A or B MSS)
2. Binder for A : Type 22.0 Kg.
3. Binder for B : Type 19.0 Kg.
Temperature : Same as in 20 mm PMC.

SIZE REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE STONE

AGGREGATES FOR PAVEMENT COURSES

S.No Nominal Size of Designation of Sieve Designation of sieve

 aggregate through the on which the agg.
aggregate shall Shall be shortly
wholly pass retained
1 75mm 106mm 63mm
2 63mm 90mm 53mm
3 45mm 53mm 26.5mm
4 26.5mm 45mm 22.4mm
5 22.4mm 26.5mm 13.2mm
6 13.2mm 22.4mm 11.2mm
7 11.2mm 11.2mm 6.7mm
8 6.7mm 11.2mm 2.8mm

PERCENT REDUCTION IN VOLUME OF AGGREGATES

Standard size of aggregate Percentage reduction in volume
Computed by stack measurements
To arrive at the value to be paid for
1 75 mm and 63 mm 12.5
2 45mm and 26.5 mm 10.0
3 22.4 mm, 132mm, 112mm and 6.7mm 5.0
4 Fine aggregates 5.0

SEAL COAT
(A) Types : Two types of Seal Coat
ii. (Type A) Liquid seal coat:
An application of a layer binder followed by a cover of stone chips
iii. (Type B) Premix seal Coat:
A thin application of fine aggregate (sand or grit) premixed with binder
(B) Quantity of Binder per 10 gms:
1. For type “A” : 9.8 Kgs
2. For type “B” : 6.5 Kgs

c. Quantity of Chips per 10 gms:

i. Type A: 6.7 mm size : 0.09 cum (passing 100%) 11.2 mm Sieve and
retained on 2.36 mm sieve.
ii. Type B: Aggregate:- 0.06 cum (Passing 100%) 2.36 mm sieve 9and
retained on 180 mic.)
d. The aggregate for type A shall be conform except W.A max 1%.

REQUIREMENTS OF PHYSICAL
PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN
S.No Characteristics Requirement
1 Penetration at 290C (in 1/100cm) 15 + 5
2. Softening point (Ring and Ball method) 65 + 10
3. Loss on Heating (max.) 2.0
4. Solubility in triclereethiene Ash (Mineral matter) 95
% by mass Max. 10
In cold climatic region (Temperature <10 C) a softer penetration grade of 30/40
0

may be used.
Table 500-30 GRADING OF COARSE
AGGREGATE (C.A)
Nominal Size 13mm 13mm
Thickness of ` % of Grading of C.A
Finished course (mm) Course Agg. Save % passing
(a) 25-50 40 + 10 19.0 mm 100
13.2 mm 88-96
(b) 40-50 45 + 10 2.366 mm 0-5
GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATE
(INCLUSIVE OF FILLER)
S.No Sieves % by weight
Passing Retained
1 2.36 mm 600 mic. 0-25
2. 600 mic. 212 mic. 10-30
3. 212 mic. 75 mic. 10-30
4. 75 mic. - 30-55
Bitumen Binder 14-17

COMPOSITION OF B.M
BLOCKS WITHOUT COARSE AGGREGATE
Passing Retained % Min % Max.
2.30 mm 600 mic 0 22
600 mic 212 mic 4 30
212 mic 75 mic 8 18
75 mic - 25 45
14 17

SLURRY SEAL COAT

AGGREGATE GRADING BINDER CONTENT
AND APPROXIMATE COVERAGE RATE

Sieve Size Percentage by mass passing

Finished thickness of sealing
 5mm 3mm 1.5mm
9.5 100 - -
4.75 90-100 100 -
3.35 - 80-100 100
2.36 65-90 75-100 95-100
1.18 45-70 55-90 70-95
0.600 30-50 35-70 55-75
0.300 18-30 20-45 30-50
0.100 10-21 10-25 10-30
0.075 5-15 5-15 5-15
Quantity of 7.5-13.5 residual binder 10-16 12-20
percentage by mass of aggregate
Approximate 8-15 coverage rate (Kg/m2)
4-6 2-4

IV SURFACE
CONTROL OF ALIGNMENT LEVAL AND SURFACE
REGULATORY
TOLERANCE IN SURFACE LEVELS
1. Sub Grade +20mm
2. Sub-base + 10mm -25mm
(a) Flexible pavement -20mm
(b) Concrete pavement +6mm
(Dry lean or rolled concrete) -10mm
3. Base course for flexible pavement +6mm
(a) Bituminous Course -6mm
(b) Other than bituminous +10mm
i. Machine laid -10mm
ii. Manually laid +15mm
4. Wearing course for flexible pavement -15mm
i. Machine laid +6mm
ii. Manually laid -6mm
5. Cement Concrete pavement +10mm
-10mm
+5mm
-6mm

MAX. PERMITTED NUMBER

OF SURFACE IRREGULARITIES
Surfaces of carriage Surface of laybys
ways and paved service area and
shoulder Bitumen Base Course
Irregularity 4mm 7mm 4mm 7mm
Length (m) 300-75 300-75 300-75 300-75
NHW/ 20 9 2 1 40 18 4 2
Expressways
Roads of 40 18 4 2 60 27 6 3
Lower category
The max. allowable difference between the road surface and underside of 3 m
straight when parallel with or at right angles to the centre lined the road at any
point.
1. For pavement surface 3mm
(Bituminous and cement concrete)
2. For bituminous base course 6mm
3. For granular 9sub-base/base-course) 8mm
4. For Sub-base under : Concrete pavement 10mm
COMMON VALUES OF ROUGHNESS
Roughness in mm/Km.
Surface/Surface Good Average Poor Very Poor
Type/Condition

Asphaltic concrete 2000-2500 2500-3500 3500-4000 Over 4000

Premix carpet 2500-4500 4500-5500 5500-5600 Over 6500
Surface Dressing 4000-5000 5000-6500 6500-7500 Over 7500
WBM/Gravel 8000-9000 9000-10000 10000-12000 Over 12000
The ministry of shipping & Transport recommend the following values to be the
maximum for new construction:
Asphaltic concrete : 2500 mm/Km
Premix carpet : 3500 mm/Km
Surface dressing : 4500 mm/Km

Engineering Information
List of Mandatory Tests (Required for Road Materials)
Material Test Field Test Procedure Min. Frequency of
Laboratory Quantity Testing
/Value
1 2 3 4 5 6
Coarse 1. Los Angeles Lab. IS 2386 (Part-IV) Per 200 m2
Aggregate
2. Abrasion Is 2389 (Part-V)
Value or
aggregate
 impact value IS 5640
3. Flakiness IS: 2386 (Part-I)
index Grading Field IS 2386 (Part-I) NIL Per 100 m2
requirement
Fine Aggregate Deleterious Laboratory IS 2386 (Part-III) NIL As required by
materials NIL the Engineer-
in-charge
Bitumen As prescribed Laboratory As prescribed in NIL As required by
in IS 73 IS 73 the Engineer-
in-charge
Embankment 1. Moisture Laboratory IS 2720 (Part-I) NIL 250 m2
under (O.M.C. content
Conditions) 2. Density Field IS 2720 NIL 250 m2
3. Compact test Laboratory (Part-XXVIII)
On borrow
pits.
(a) Gradation Laboratory IS 2720 (Part-IV) NIL One to two
(b) Plasticity Laboratory IS 2386 (Part-V) NIL tests per 8000
(c) Proctor Test Laboratory IS 2386 (Part-VI) NIL cum
(d) Deleterious Laboratory IS 2386 (Part-VII) NIL ..do..
Contents ..do..
(e) Moisture Laboratory IS 2386 (Part-II) NIL As required by
Contents Engineer-in-
charge

Engineering Information
Theoritical Consumption Road Roller Per Day in Road Work

1 Consolidation of earth-subgrade 1860 sqm

2 Consolidation of stone soling 15 to 22.5 cm thick 170 cum
3 Consolidation of wearing coat of stone ballast 7.5 cm to 11.5 cm 30 cum
4 Consolidation of red bajri 6 mm 1860 sqm
5 Painting one coat using stone aggregate 12.5 mm size @ 1.65 m per 100 m and paving 930 sqm
bitumin A-90 or S-90 2.25 Kg/Sqm
6 Painting two coats using stone aggregate 12.5 m,m nominal @ 1.5 M per 100 m with 600 sqm
paving bitumin A-90 or S-90 @ 2 Kg/m size/100 sqm for first coatr and 0.90 cum stone
aggregate 10mm size/100 sqm. for second
7 Re-painting with stone aggregate 10 mm size at 0.90 cum per 100 sqm 1670 sqm
8 2 cm Premix carpetting using 2.4 cum stoen aggregate 10mmsize/100 sqm 930 sqm
9 2.5 cm premix carpetting using 3 cum stone aggregate 10mm size/100 sqm 930 sqm
10 4 mm thiock bitumin concrete surfacing using 3.8 cum stone aggregate (60% 25mm & 460 sqm
40% 12.50m) & 1.9 cum coarse sand per 100 sqm
11 5 cm thick bitumin concrete surfacing using 5.8 cum stone aggregate (60% 40mm & 40% 370 sqm
25mm) & 2.4 coarse sand per 100 sqm
12 6 cm thick bitumin concrete surfacing using 5.8 cum stone aggregate (60% 50mm & 40% 280 sqm
40mm) & 2.9 cum coarse sand per 100 sqm
13 7.5 cm thick bitumin concrete surfacing using 7.3 cum stone aggregate (60% 50mm & 230 sqm
40% 40mm) & 3.65 cum coarse sand per 100 sqm
14 2.5 cm thick bitumastic sheet using 1.65 cum (60% 50mm & 40% 40mm) & 3.65 cum 750 sqm
coarse sand per 100 sqm
15 4 cm thick bitumastic sheet using 2.6 cum (60% 12.5mm & 40% 10mm) & 1.65 cum coarse 560 sqm
sand per 100 sqm
16 Laying full grouted surface using 40mm size stone aggregate 6.10 cum, 1.83 cum binder 460 sqm
(20mm to 123.5mm size stone grit & 1.07 cum seal coat with 10mm stone grit per 100 sqm
17 Laying full grouted surface using 50mm size stone aggregate 9.14 cum, 1.83 cum binder 370 sqm
& 1.07 cum seal coat with 10mm stone grit per 100 sqm
18 4 cm premix macadum using 4.57 cum 25mms stone aggregate with 1.50 cm binder 560 sqm
(12.5mm) and 1.07 cum seal coat with 10mm size stone aggregate per 100 sqm
19 5 cm premix macadum using 6.10 cum 25mms stone aggregate with 1.52 cm binder 460 sqm
(12.5mm) and 1.07 cum seal coat with 10mm size stone aggregate per 100 sqm

CALCULATION OF THEORETICAL FIELD DENSITY &

% BITUMEN FOR 20 MM PMC
Calculation procedure
i. Bulk density of mix grit (gm/cc) (13.2 & 11.2mm) d-1
ii. Bulk density of mix grit (Kg/cum) (d-1x1000) D
iii. Loose volume of mix grit per 10 sq. meter (As per IRC) 0.27 cum
iv. Weight of mix grit per 10 sq. mtr Dx0.27 Kg
v. Weight of Bitumen per 10 sq. mtr 14.6 Kg
vi. Total weight of material per 10 sq.mtr incl. bitumen (Dx27)+14.6
vii. % Bitumen (14.6(Dx0.27)+14.6*100
viii. Compacted volume of PMC per 10 sq. mtr 0.20 cum
ix. Theoretical field density gm/cc (Dx0.27)+14.6s/.020
Example:
Volume of Container (cc) 15000
Weight of grit (gm) 21080
Bulk density of grit (gm/cc) 1.41
Volume of grit10 sqm (gms.) 270000
Mass of grit10 sqm (gms) 379440
Weight of Bitumen (gms) 14600
Total material/10 sqm (gms) 394040
% Bitumen 3.71
Volume of compacted grit (cc) 200000
Density (gms/cc) 1.97

MONTHLY RETURN OF QUALITY CONTROL

No of tests required as per norms of the Qty

Circle/Di

conducte
Total No

required
Name of

Total no
Total no
ongoing

of tests

executed during the month

of tests
vision
S.NO

of

J.E A.E E.E EE(QC) S.E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note: Quality control tests to be conducted by each JEN and AEN as per norms
should be monitored by Executive Engineer conceded and for any deficiency
higher officer should be intimated accordingly.
2. Return to be submitted on 7 th and 22nd of every month to E.E (M & Q.C) CE
office Jaipur
TEST COINDUCTED BY FIELD STAFF AND Q.C DN
Month________________

No of tests conducted during No of sub standard tests conducted during

taken fdr

Remarks
month(_______) by month (______________)

Action

sub
JE AE EE EE(QC) SE JE AE EE EE(QC) SE
7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 9 10

FORTNIGHT PROGRESS REPORT

Zone:
Circle:
Division:
Name of On-going work with job No:
Wt of mix material (Kg) Bitumen content test
inspection
conducted

(%)
Sample
Date of
Tests
S.No

No
by

1 2 3 4 5a 5b 5c 6a 6b 6c
1 S.E 1
2
2 E.E 1
2
3 A.E.N 1
2
4 EE/AE 1
(QC) 2
5 TOATO 1
Lab 2
6 Other 1
2
Note:
1. Work-wise separate sheet should be submitted
3. Return to be submitted on 7th and 22nd of every month to E.E (M&
Q.C) CE Office, Jaipur
OF Q/C TESTS OF BITUMINOUS WORKS
Month_______________
Fortnight I/II/QP-4
Density test (gm/cc) Penetration test Softening point test

taken for
the poor

remarks
Action
per

per
Density as
job

standards

standards
density

OK/SS

OK/SS

OK/SS
Actual

Actual

Actual
mix
per

As

As

7a 7b 7c 8a 8b 8c 9a 9b 9c 10 11

GUIDELINES FOR KEEPING RECORD OF BULK BITUMEN

Contractor PAVER WORK
(1) Bitumen record (receipt/Consumption/Balance) should be submitted to
Superintending Engineer every week by Monday in performa prescribed
below:

Tanker Details of dispatch

Consum,pti
Comulative

Jen/AEn of
on during
Received

Remarks
Name of

Name of

CRC No
refinery

Balance
Date of

Sign of
driver

Desp.
Time

Time
S.No

Date

Qty.

Qty

qty
No

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(2) Assistant engineer should mention a certificate on the original CRC copy
about unloading of bulk bitumen, name of work, plant site & page number
of bulk bitumen record register with dated signature and seal.
(3) A certificate on the original Ist copy of CRC be made by Executive Engineer
concerned, that the quantity of bitumen of this CRC been unloaded at the
site for the work (Name of work) on the basis of Assistant Engineer
concerned site by contractor.
(4) Testing of bitumen shall be done as per norms, for which equipment shall
be made available at site by contractor in a laboratory, to be established at
plant site by contractor.
(5) At the time of receipt of bitumen, the Assistant Engineer should get the
tanker (filled/Empty) to be weighed in his presence & a certificate in this
regard should be issued by him for each tanker. The receipt of weigh bridge
should be mentioned in certificate.
(6) Executive Engineer will get the weekly report about receipt/consumption
and balance of bulk bitumen of contractor from all sub-divisions.
(7) At least 5% bitumen tanks weighing should be verified by Ex. Engineer
concerned.
(8) Ex. Engineer should ensure that to bulk bitumen other than authentically
issued from authorized refinery should be used on any work in his
jurisdiction. Executive Engineer should get the purchase record of bitumen
from contractor and it should be recorded in separate register/M.B for each
work.
(9) Separate record shall be maintained of packed bitumen/imported
bitumen/ rubberized bitumen for contractor work.
PUBLIC
 HEALTH

ENGINEERING

Width & Depths of Trenches for Sewers

The maximum width of trenches in respect of which payment will be

allowed for excavation will be as follows:
a. Trenches not exceeding 2.1 metres in depth – 50 cm, plus external diameter
of Barrel for pipe sewers and 15 cm plus maximum external overall diamter
or width of sewer for brick on concrete sewers constucted in situ.
b. Trenches not exceeding 2.1 metre and not exceeding 4.5 metre – 60 cms plus
external diamete of barrel for pipe sewers and 30 cm plus maximum
exteranl overall diamter or width of sewer for brick or concrete seweres
constructed in situi.
c. Trenches exceeding 4.5 metre depth – 68 cms plus external diamter or barel
for pipe sewers and 45 cms plus maximum external overall diamter or
width of sewer for brick or concrete sewers constructed in situ.
 The cross section of trenches to eb excavated below the level of the
crown of the barrels, in the case of circular sewers of all classes and below the
intrados of the covering arches shall be trimmed accurately to the exact cross-
sections of the sewers to be laid or constructed therein and no earth filling shall
be permitted between the sides ofd scradle of envelope and the trench sides
belwo the horiozontal diamteres or springings of the covering arches of the
sewers as the case may be.

Method for finding out weight of a pipe

D Internal diameter of pipe in inches
D Thickness of pipe in inches
Weight of pipe in lbs. per rft.
(i) Cast Iron Pipe = (D-d) x d x 9.8
(ii) Wrought Iron Pipe = (D-d) x d x 10.56
(iii) Brass Pipe = (D-d) x d x 11.28
(iv) Copper Pipe = (D-d) x d x12.12
(v) Lead Pipe = (D-d) x d x15.44

WEIGHT OF G.I. PIPES

S.No Size of pipe Meter in one tone
Light Wt. Medium Wt.
1. 15 mm 1040 mtr. 813 mtr.
2. 20 mm 704 mtr. 629 mtr.
3. 25 mm 493 mtr. 407 mtr.
4. 32 mm 383 mtr. 316 mtr.
5. 40 mm 304 mtr. 274 mtr.
6. 50 mm 239 mtr. 193 mtr.
7. 65 mm 169 mtr. 151 mtr.
8. 80 mm 143 mtr. 116 mtr.

WEIGHT OF H.C.I. PIPES

S.No. Internal dia Thickness of Thickness of Wt. of 1.80 mt
Of pipes metal in pipes
sockets with socket &
Braded spigot
1. 50 mm 5 mm 6 mm 11.41 Kg.
2. 75 mm 5 mm 6 mm 15.52 Kg.
3. 100 mm 5 mm 6 mm 21.67 Kg.

WEIGHT OF C.I. D/F Sluice Valves

1. 80 mm i/d 35 kg/each
2. 100 mm i/d 45 kg/each
3. 150 mm i/d 90 kg/each

WEIGHT OF S.W. PIPES

1. 100 mm dia. = 8.0 Kg.
2. 150 mm dia. = 14 Kg.
3. 200 mm dia. = 18.5 Kg.
4. 250 mm dia. = 28 Kg.
5. 300 mm dia. = 37.0 Kg.

WEIGHT OF A.C. PIPES

1. 50 mm dia = 04.900 Kg/m
2. 80 mm dia. = 06.225 Kg/m
3. 100 mm dia. = 07.800 Kg/m
4. 125 mm dia. = 09.800 Kg/m
5. 150 mm dia. = 12.150 Kg/m.
6. 200 mm dia. = 19.100 Kg/m
7. 250 mm dia. = 25.000 Kg/m
8. 300 mm dia. = 32.750 Kg/m

WEIGHT OF M.S. PLATES

S.No Thickness in mm Gauge Wt. per Sqm. mtr.
1. 0.45 mm 28 3.15 kg.
2. 0.50 mm 26 3.90 kg.
3. 0.63 mm 24 4.95 kg.
4. 0.80 mm 22 6.30 kg.
5. 0.90 mm 21 7.05 kg.
6. 1.00 mm 20 7.85 kg.
7. 1.12 mm 19 8.80 kg.
8. 1.25 mm 18 9.80 kg.
9. 1.40 mm 17 11.00 kg.
10. 1.60 mm 16 12.55 kg.
11. 1.80 mm 15 14.15 kg.
12. 2.00 mm 14 15.70 kg.
13. 2.24 mm 13 17.60 kg.
14. 2.50 mm 12 19.60 kg.
15. 2.80 mm 11 22.00 kg.
16. 3.15 mm 10 24.75 kg.
17. 4.00 mm 08 32.50 kg.

CEMENT CONSUMPTION FOR SANITARY WORKS

1. Indian W.C. = 0.20 bags/each
2. Wash Hand Basin = 0.03 bags/each
3. Sink = 0.02 bags/each
4. Urinal = 0.04 bags/each
5. Floor Trap = 0.05 bags/each
6. Gully Trap = 0.50 bags/each
7. Peet Valve Haudi 1’x1’ = 0.80 bags/each
8. Sluice Valve Haudi 2’x2’ = 1.50 bags/each
9. Fire Hydraunt = 1.58 bags/each
10. C.I/M.I. Steps. = 0.01 bags/each
11. Manhole Cover & frame Lt.Wt. = 0.05 bags/each
12. Holder Bats = 0.25 bags/each
13. Bell Mouth = 0.05 bags/each
14. M.S. Clamp = 0.50 bags/each
15. Steel Tanks = 1.00 bags/each
16. High Level / Low Level Cistern = 1.00 bags/% No
17. G.I.Waste pipe = 0.01 bags/each
18. M.S. Clamp for rain water = 0.02 bags/each

Construction of Inspection Chambers Extra for 0.30 m depth

Size 0.45 m x 0.45 m = 1.50 bag/each 0.50 bag/each
Size 0.45 m x 0.60 m = 2.00 bag/each 0.60 bag/each
Size 0.60 m x 0.90 m = 2.50 bag/each 0.70 bag/each

Consumption of cement in cutting chase per 10 Sqm.

Size 75 mm x 50 mm = 0.45 bags
Size 75 mm x 75 mm = 2.64 bags
Size 150 mm x 150 mm = 2.56 bags
Size 230 mm x 230 mm = 5.75 bags

Consumption of cement in house drains per 10 M.

Type I = 1.35 bags
Type II = 2.67 bags
Type III = 3.00 bags
Type IV = 3.35 bags
House connection drain = 0.94 bags

Consumption of cement in cutting holes up to 23 cm thick wall per 100 nos.

1.0.075 M wall = 1 bag 2. 0.1143 M wall = 2 bags
3.0.230 M wall = 3 bags 4. 0.340 M wall = 4 bags
5.0.460 M wall = 5 bags 6. 0.570 M wall = 6 bags
7.0.690 M wall = 7 bags
Cement consumption for Benching & complicated
work in Manholes. = 3.20 bags per 10 Sqm.
Top Khurra 0.60 M x 0.60 M = 0.10 bags / each
Bottom Khurra 1.20 M x 0.60 M = 0.42 bags / each
Khassi Parnala = 0.098 bags/ metre
Red stone fixed in 1:5 mortar = 0.095 bags/ Sqm.
Kota stone fixed in 1:3 mortar = 0.40 bags / Sqm.
Cement Concrete Gola 10 cm x 10 cm = 0.063 bags/ metre
11.43 thick masonry wall in 1:4 = 0.20 bags/ Sqm.
Brick on Edge flooring with 75 mm thick cc 1:8:16 = 0.36 bags/Sqm.
Double Brick lining in storage tanks = 0.42 bags/ Sqm.

Quantity of lead and spun yarn per joint in Cast Iron Socketed Pipes, Valves
and Specials.
S.No Internal dia Quantity of lead Quantity of yarn Finished depth
of pipe per joint in Kg. per joint in Kg. of lead joint
1. 80 mm 1.80 kg. 0.10 kg. 37 mm
2. 100 mm 2.20 kg. 0.18 kg. 37 mm
3. 125 mm 2.60 kg. 0.20 kg. 37 mm
4. 150 mm 3.40 kg. 0.20 kg. 40 mm
5. 200 mm 5.00 kg. 0.30 kg. 43 mm
6. 250 mm 6.10 kg. 0.35 kg. 50 mm
7. 300 mm 7.20 kg. 0.48 kg. 50 mm
8. 350 mm 8.40 kg. 0.60 kg. 50 mm
9. 400 mm 9.50 kg. 0.75 kg. 50 mm
10. 450 mm 14.00 kg. 0.95 kg. 55 mm
11. 500 mm 15.00 kg. 1.00 kg. 59 mm
12. 600 mm 19.00 kg. 1.20 kg. 62 mm

Quantity of Lead & Hemp Yarn per joint in HCI pipes & specials for soil waste/
vent pipes
Internal dia of pipe Lead Yarn
50 mm 0.68 kg. 0.057 kg.
75 mm 0.91 kg. 0.077 kg.
100 mm 1.13 kg. 0.977 kg.
Consumption of cement and spun yarn in SW pipes with cement mortar ratio of
joint 1:1
S.No Internal dia of Quantity of cement Quantity of spun
SW pipe in bags per % joints yarn in kg. per % joints
1. 100 mm 2.00 bags 4.64 kg.
2. 150 mm 2.80 bags 9.07 kg.
3. 175 mm 3.30 bags 9.98 kg.
4. 200 mm 3.65 bags 12.25 kg.
5. 225 mm 4.00 bags 14.52 kg.
6. 250 mm 5.00 bags 16.78 kg.
7. 300 mm 6.00 bags 19.05 kg.
8. 350 mm 6.50 bags 22.08 kg.
9. 375 mm 7.00 bags 23.59 kg.
10. 400 mm 7.50 bags 25.10 kg.
11. 450 mm 8.00 bags 28.12 kg.

Consumption of cement and spun yarn in RCC pipe collar joint with cement
mortar ratio of joint 1:1 ½. And spun yarn

S.No Internal dia Quantity of cement Quantity of yarn

of pipe bags per % joints in kg. per % joints
1. 100 mm 2.03 12.00
2 150 mm 2.60 16.00
3. 200 mm 3.20 19.00
4. 225 mm 3.49 21.00
5. 250 mm 3.77 23.00
6. 300 mm 6.17 33.00
7. 350 mm 7.40 39.00
8. 400 mm 8.23 43.00
9. 450 mm 12.89 77.00
10. 500 mm 14.06 84.00
11. 600 mm 18.51 100.00
12. 700 mm 21.03 113.00
13. 800 mm 26.04 129.00
14. 900 mm 32.57 145.00
15. 1000mm 39.71 161.00
16. 1100mm 57.77 176.00
17. 1200mm 66.89 192.00
18. 1400mm 78.56 224.00
19. 1600mm 96.55 252.00
20. 1800mm 126.94 285.00
Consumption of Rubber Sheet in 1/8” thick for Double Flanged Joints.
S.No Dia of joint Rubber Sheet
1. 80 mm 0.167 kg./each
2. 100 mm 0.225 kg./each
3. 125 mm 0.338 kg./each
4. 150 mm 0.450 kg./each
5. 200 mm 0.550 kg./each
6. 250 mm 0.875 kg./each
7. 300 mm 0.925 kg./each

Consumption factor of Lean Concrete cft./rft. Under & over S.W.pipes

S.No Internal dia Type – I Type – II Type – III Type – IV Slope

Of pipe ’ to 4’ 4’ to 14’ 14’ to 20’ over 20’
1. 100 mm 0.912 0.408 0.510 1.871 1/90
2. 150 mm 1.350 0.544 0.700 2.286 1/155
3. 175 mm 1.710 0.724 0.910 2.501 1/190
4. 200 mm 1.850 0.790 1.033 2.694 1/230
5. 225 mm 2.010 0.900 1.180 2.916
6. 250 mm 2.160 1.015 1.371 3.140
7. 300 mm 3.121 1.030 1.670 3.626
8. 375 mm 3.723 1.340 2.150 4.372
9. 450 mm 4.346 2.170 2.550 5.156
In metric system

Consumption factor of Lean Concrete Cum/Mtr. Under & over S.W.Pipes

S.No Internal dia Type – I Type – II Type – III Type – IV

of pipe 0.91 to 1.22 1.22 to 4.27 4.27 to 6.10 over 6.10
1. 100 mm 0.0816 0.0370 0.0468 0.1735
2. 150 mm 0.1255 0.0496 0.0668 0.2120
3. 200 mm 0.1661 0.0741 0.0968 0.2499
4. 250 mm 0.1943 0.0930 0.1311 0.2820
5. 300 mm 0.2810 0.1289 0.1526 0.3263
6. 350 mm 0.3180 0.1565 0.1726 0.3721
7. 400 mm 0.3558 0.1785 0.1976 0.4194
8. 450 mm 0.3918 0.1969 0.2313 0.4650
 SIZES OF DOMESTIC SEPTIC TANKS
No of users Length Width Liquid Free Liquid Cleaning
In Mtrs
1.00 1.12 6
5 1.50 0.75 1.00 30 1.20 12
1.05 1.18 24
1.00 1.80 6
10 2.00 0.90 1.00 30 1.30 12
1.24 2.52 24
1.00 1.80 6.
15 2.00 0.90 1.30 30 2.34 12
2.00 3.60 24
1.00 2.53 6
20 2.30 1.10 1.30 30 3.20 12
1.80 4.55 24
1.80 5.60 6
50 4.00 1.40 1.20 30 7.28 12
2.00 1.12 24
NORMS FOR COLOUR SCHEME FOR PIPES
G.I.Pipes & C.I.Pipes
(i) Pipe lines from mains intake to tanks, shower, W.H.B,
Sinks with in Duct/ out let of OHSR = Light Blue
(ii) Pipe lines exposed with in rooms & lavatory blocks = White
(iii) Pipe lines intake for flushing from tank to flushing
Cisterns and inlet of OHSR = Light Green
(iv) Intake to Geyser and over flow of OHSR = P.O. Red
(v) Vents for Geyser & air vents and scour of OHSR = Yellow

NORMS FOR COLOUR SCHEME FOR H.C.I. PIPES

(i) In ducts and above roof = Black
(ii) Exposed in corridors = matching with room
WATER

SUPPLY
 PHYSICAL & CHEMICAL
STANDARDS FOR POTABLE WATER

1. P.H. Value = 7.0 to 8.5

2. Total Dissolved Solids = 500 ppm

3. Total Hardness = 200 ppm

4. Chlorides = 200 ppm

5. Fluorides = 100 ppm

6. Nitrates = 45 ppm

7. Calcium = 75 ppm

8. Magnesium = 30 ppm

9. Iron = 0.1 ppm

 Requirement of Water per Head per Day in litres
1. Residences (domestic use- 90 ltr. + flushing use – 45 ltr.) = 135 litres.
2. Factories with provision of bath rooms. = 45 litres.
3. Factories with out provision of bath rooms. = 30 litres.
4. Hospitals (including laundry) per bed
(i) No of beds not exceeding 100 = 340 litres.
(ii) No of beds exceeding 100 = 455 litres.
5. Nurse’s homes and medical quarters. = 135 litres.
6. Hostels = 135 litres.
7. Hotels (per bed) = 180 litres.
8. Offices. = 45 litres.
9. Restaurants (per seat) = 70 litres.
10. Cinemas, concert halfs theatres (per seat) = 15 litres.
11. Schools.
(i) Day Schools = 45 litres.
(ii) Boarding Schools = 135 litres

Miscellaneous
1. Gardens, Sport Grounds = 3.5 litres per Sqm.
2. Animals, Vehicles = 4.5 litres./each
3. Swimming Pools = 4% in addition to the capacity
for losses due to evaporation
 and filtration.
4. Fire Extinction = Q-3000/P
(Q- demand in litres per minute)
( P- population in thousands)
5. Air Conditioning = 70 litres/hour/100 Sqm. of area to
be air conditioned.

Storage to be allowed for various fittings

1. Bath Tubs = 200 litres.

2. Water Closet, Urinal, Courtyard Tap = 180 litres.

3. Showers = 135 litres.

4. Lavatory Basin, Sink = 90 litres.

5. Down Taps = 70 litres.

CONSERVE WATER IN THE FOLLOWING WAY

1 While Brushing Teeth Turn off the tap Water Saved

while brushing 5-10 Litres

2 While Washing Use wash cloth and Water Saved

Hands & Face turn off the tap 8-15 Litres

3 While Shaving Fill mug and Turn off Water Saved

the tap 10-15 Litres

4 During Shower Rinse, turn off the Water Saved

Tap, soap rinse again 20-40 Litres

5 Any leakage in line Pledase report to Water Saved

Dept. Immediately 400-30005 litres
 DO NOT NEGLECT SMALL LEAKS

THESE ARE BIG DRAINERS OF OUR REVENUE

Loss of one drop of water per second amount to 36 litres per week,
1080 litres per month and 12960 litres per year.
Flow of water is proportional to the pressure in the pipeline, high
pressure result in increased flow and thereby increase in wastage through leaks.
Increase in pressure from 1.80 KIg/sq.cm result in approximately 30 0 increase in
flow and wastage both.
The table below statistics of loss of water through leaks of various
sizes of holes in pipe line at 3.30 Kg/sq.cm of pressure.
Size of leaking Loss of water at 3.30 Kg/sq.cm pressure
hole Per hour Per day Per month Per year
0.40 mm 68 L 1,632 L 48,960 L 5,87,520 L
0.80 mm 122 L 2,828 L 87,840 L 10,54,080 L
1.60 mm 726 L 17,424 L 5,22,720 L 62,72,640 L
3.20 mm 872 L 20,928 L 6,27,840 L 75,34,080 L
6.40 mm 2,043 L 49,032 L 14,70,960 L 1,76,51,520 L
12.80 mm 9,988 L 2,39,712 L 71,91,360 L 8,62,96,320 L
19.20 mm 20,430 L 4,90,320 L 1,47,09,600 L 17,65,15,200 L
25.40 mm 36,744 L 8,82,576 L 2,64,77,280 L 31,77,27,360 L

Besides loss of precious drinking water, cost of pumping, cost of treatment, loss
of revenue:
 Leakages can be a great source of contaminations

Weight of C.I. Rain Water Pipes Fittings

Desscription 75 mm dia 100 mm dia 150 mm dia Unit
(Weight) (Weight in (Weight in (Weight in
Kg) Kg) Kg)
Bends[plain] 3.20 4.50 9.10 Each
Offsets [plain] 2.70 5.00 8.20 Each
55mm projection 3.20 5.50 9.10 Each
115mm projection 4.10 6.40 9.50 Each
150mm projection 4.50 7.30 10.40. Each
225mm projection 5.00 8.60 11.80 Each
300mm projection 6.00 7.30 12.70 Each
Branches plain Each
Single 5.00 10.00 14.50
Double 6.80 4.10 18.10 Each
Standard shoes [plain] 3.20 5.00 8.60 Each
Longer shoe Each
300mm 3.20 5.00 -
450mm 4.10 5.50 - Each
600mm 5.50 6.40 - Each
Heads 7.30 8.60 - Each
Extras 6.40 6.80 1.25 Each
For ears cast on anything & short pipes 0.90 0.90 1.35 Each
For inspection door that on any fitting 1.80 1.80 2.25 Each

Note: 1. the above table applies only to rain, water fittings etc, which are part of
pipe lines fixed on wall face. Permissible tolerance in weight of fittings shall
be 5%.
2. For fittings to be used with pipe lines to be embedded in fittings, for soil,
water and vent pipes in their weights specification under S.C.I. soil water,
and vent pipe may be referred to
 PVC Storage Tanks

S.No Capacity Litres Minimum wall thickness Minimum Weight of

mm empty Tank
Kg
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 200 4.4 7.8
2 300 4.4 9.0
3 400 5.5 15.0
4 500 6.0 18.0
5 700 6.6 22.5
6 1000 7.0 33.5
7 1250 7.0 40.0
8 1500 7.0 47.0
9 1700 7.0 54.0
10 2000 8.2 64.0
11 2500 8.2 81.0
12 3000 8.8 96.0
13 4000 10.4 138.0
14 5000 10.7 191.0
15 6000 10.7 209.0
16 7500 10.7 250.0
17 10000 11.5 363.0
18 15000 11.5 550.0
19 20000 13.2 814.0
 Particulars of Medium Grade G.I. Pipe

Nominal Dimension of Pipes Thickness Weight of Pipe

Bore Outside diameter (mm) Plain end screwed end
(mm) Max Min Socket
(mm) (mm) Kg/m Kg/m

6 10.6 9.8 2.0 0..404 0.407

8 14.0 13.2 2.30 0.641 0.645
10 17.5 16.7 2.30 0.839 0.845
15 21.8 21.0 2.30 1.21 1.22
20 27.3 26.5 2.60 1.56 1.57
25 34.2 33.3 2.60 2.41 2.43
32 42.9 42.0 3.20 3.1 3.13
40 48.8 47.9 3.20 3.56 3.6
50 60.8 59.7 3.60 5.03 5.10
65 76.6 75.3 3.60 6.42 6.54
80 89.9 88.0 4.00 8.36 8.53
100 115.0 113.1 4.50 12.20 1.256
125 140.0 138.5 4.80 15.90 1.640
150 166.5 163.9 4.80 18.90 1.950

Tolerance in thickness and weight

a) Thickness
1. Butt welded medium tubes +not limited
-10 percent
2. Seamless tubes +not limited
-12.5 percent
b) Weight:
1. single tube (irrespective of quantity) +10percent
-8 percent
2. For quantities of less than 150m of one-size +10percent
-8 percent
3. for quantities of 15m and over one size +10percent
-8 poercent
4. Single Tube (medium & heavy series) +10percent
5. For quantities for load of 10 tonness (light series) + 5 percent
6. For quantities per load of 10 tonnes (minimum) + 7.5%

The value of K will depend in the following conditions

Service conditions
Nominal dia Water Main Sewers Gas Mains
80-300 K9-K12 K7-K12 K9-K12
350-600 K8-K10 K7-K10 K9-K10
 700-2000 K7-K10 K7-K10 K9-K10

For screwed of welded on flange pipes the minimum classes per working
pressure are given below:

Nominal dia Screwed on Flange Welded on Flange Minimum

PN10 PN16 PN25 PN40 PN10 PN16 PN25 PN40

80-450 K9 K9 K9 K9 K9 K9 K9 K9
500-600 K10 K10 K10 K10 K9 K9 K9 K10
700-1200 K10 K10 K10 - K9 K9 K9 -
1400-2000 K10 K10 - - K9 K9 - -

SAMPLING
Sampling criteria for various tests, unless, specified. In this standard, shall be as
laid down in IS 1106
The mechanical acceptance shall be carried out on samples of ductile pipes
which shall be grouped in the following batch sizes:

DN (mm) Maximum Batch Size

80-200 200 Pipes
300-600 100 Pipes
700-1000 60 Pipes
1100-1400 40 Pipes
11600-2000 30 Pipes

The Thickness of the sample and the diameter

Castings Thickness Test Bar, Test Bar, Method-B
Mm Method-A Nominal Nominal Tolerance
Nominal Area Diameter Diameter
Centrifugally Cast Pipes Diameter S,mm2 mm mm
mm
-less than 6 2.5 5.0 2.52 0.01
-6 but not including 8 3.5 10.0 3.57 0.02
-9 upto but not including 12 5.0 20.0 5.05 0.02
-12 and over 6.0 30.0 6.18 0.03

Test Results
Test results shall comply with the requirements given below:
One test piece obtained by cutting bars from pigments end of one pipe selected for
testing when tested in accordance with the methods specified in 10.4 shall satisfy
the following requirements
Nominal Diameter (DN) Maximum Tensile Strength Minimum Elongation at Break
Mm MPa Percent
80-100 420 10
1100-2000 420 7

HYDRAUSTATIC TEST:
 It is recommended that the hydraulic test pressure at workshop be expressed in
MPa as a function of the co-efficient K(4.3) be calculated using the following
formulae:
For DN 80 to 300 P = 0.05 (K-3)2
For DN 350 to 600 P = 0.05 (K-1)2
For DN 700 to 1100 P = 0.05 (K-1)2
For DN 1100 to 2200 P = 0.05 (K-2)2

Recommended hydraulic tests pressure and hydraulic

working pressure given in Table E:
Hydraulic Test pressure at Works for Ductile Iron Pipes
(Classes 4.6 and 11.1)

Nominal Minimum Hydraulic Pressure Test at Works for Ductile Iron Pipes, MPa
Diameter Flexible Pipes Pipes with screwed or welded flanges
(DN) Class K7 Class K8 Class K9 PN 10 PN16 PN 25 PN 40
mm ClassK10 Flange Flange Flange Flange
ClassK11
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
80-00 1.0 4.0 5.0 1.6 2.5 3.2 4.0
350-600 2.5 3.2 4.0 1.6 2.5 3.2 4.0
700-1000 1.8 2.5 3.2 1.6 2.5 3.2 -
1100-2000 1.2 1.8 2.5 1.6 2.5 2.5 -

Dimensions of Sockets and Spigot Pipes, Classes K7, K8,K9 and K10
(Clauses 3.21, 12.2, 13.3 and 15.3.2)
All dimensions in millimetres

Nominal External Barrel Wall Thickness

Diameter Diameter K7 K8 K9 K10
50 98 5 6 6.0 6.0
100 118 5 6 6.0 6.1
150 144 5 6 6.0 6.3
180 170 5 6 6.0 6.5
200 222 5 6 6.5 7.0
250 274 3.5 6 6.5 7.5
300 326 5.6 6.4 7.2 8.0
350 378 6.0 6.8 7.2 8.5
400 429 6.3 7.2 7.3 9.0
450 480 6.6 7.6 7.4 9.5
 500 532 7.0 8.0 8.5 10.0
600 635 7.07 8.8 9.0 11.0
700 738 9.0 9.6 9.8 12.0
750 790 9.2 10.0 10.8 12.5
800 882 10.4 10.4 11.2 13.0
900 943 11.2 11.2 11.2 14.0
1000 1048 12.0 12.0 12.1 15.0
1100 1352 14.4 14.4 13.1 16.0
1200 1255 15.3 15.3 14.1 17.0
1300 1402 17.1 17.1 15.1 19.0
1500 1668 18.9 18.9 17.1 21.0
1800 1875 20.7 20.7 18.1 23.0
2000 2000 22.5 22.5 22.5 25.0

ANNEXURE-E
(Table 1)
HYDROSTATIC SITE TEST PRESSURES AND HYDRAULIC WORKING
PRESSURE
Suggested maximum hydrostatic pressure of surge and (inclusive of surge) may
be followed as and maximum hydraulic working pressure (exclusive surge as
under):

DN K9 K10
(mm) Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable
operating Maximum Surge Test operating Maximum Surge Test
pressure operating (STP) pressure operating (STP)
(Excluding pressure (Excluding pressure
Surge) (Including Surge) (Including
WOP Surge) MOP Surge)
MOP WOP
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
80 6.4 7.7 9.6 6.4 7.7 9.6
100 6.4 7.6 9.6 6.4 7.7 9.6
125 6.4 7.5 9.6 6.4 7.7 9.6
150 6.4 7.4 9.6 6.4 7.7 9.6
200 6.2 7.3 7.9 6.4 7.7 9.6
 250 5.4 7.2 7.0 6.1 7.7 7.8
300 4.9 6.5 6.4 5.6 7.3 7.2
350 4.5 5.8 5.9 4.8 6.7 6.6
400 4.2 5.4 5.6 4.5 6.1 6.3
450 4.0 5.1 5.3 4.4 5.8 5.9
500 3.8 4.8 5.1 4.1 5.4 5.8
600 3.6 4.6 4.8 3.8 5.3 5.4
700 3.4 4.5 4.6 3.6 4.9 5.1
750 3.3 4.1 4.4 3.5 4.6 4.9
800 3.2 3.9 4.3 3.4 4.4 4.8
900 3.1 3.2 4.2 3.3 4.3 4.7
1000 3.0 3.1 4.1 3.2 4.2 4.6
1100 2.9 3.0 4.0 2.9 4.1 4.5
1200 2.8 3.0 3.9 2.8 3.8 4.3
1400 2.7 3.0 3.8 2.6 3.7 4.2
1500 2.7 3.0 3.7 2.5 3.6 4.1
1600 2.6 2.9 3.7 2.4 3.6 4.1
1800 2.6 2.2 3.6 2.1 3.5 4.0
2000 2.6 3.1 3.6 2.0 3.5 4.0

CLASSIFICATION OF RCC PIPES

For the purpose of this standard, concrete pipes shall be classified as under:
Class Description Conditions where
normally used
NP1 Unreinforced concrete non-pressure For drainage and irrigation use,
above ground or in shallow
trenches
NP2 Reinforced concrete, light-duty, non- For drainage and irrigation use, for
pressure pipes cross drains/culverts carrying light
traffic
NP3 Reinforced and also For drainage and irrigation use, for
Un-reinforced (in case of pipes cross drains/culverts carrying
manufactured by vibrated casting medium traffic
process), concrete, medium-duty.
Non-pressure pipes
NP4 Reinforced and also For drainage and irrigation use, for
Un-reinforced (in case of pipes cross drains/culverts carrying
manufactured by vibrated casting heavy traffic
process), concrete, heavy-duty. Non-
pressure pipes
P1 Reinforced concrete pressure pipes For use on gravity mains the site
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 0.4 test pressure not exceeding two-
MPa(20m head) thirds of the hydrostatic test
pressure
P2 Reinforced concrete pressure pipes For use on pumping mains the site
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 0.4 test pressure not exceeding half of
MPa(40m head) the hydrostatic test pressure
P3 Reinforced concrete pressure pipes For use on pumping mains, the site
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 0.4 test pressure not exceeding half of
MPa(60m head) the hydrostatic test pressure
 Design and Strength Test Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP1, Un-
Reinforced, Non-Pressure Pipes
(Clauses 6.1.1, 6.3 and 8.1)

Internal Barrel wall Collar Dimension Minimum Strength test

diameter of thickness Minimum Maximum length of requirements
pipes caulking thickness collar for three edge
space bearing test
ultimate load
test
mm mm mm mm mm KN/Linear
meter
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
80 25 13 25 150 15.3
100 25 13 25 150 15.3
150 25 13 25 150 15.3
200 25 13 25 150 16.4
225 25 13 25 150 16.4
250 25 13 25 150 16.4
300 30 16 30 150 17.6
350 32 16 32 150 18.4
400 32 16 32 150 18.8
450 35 19 35 200 21.9
Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-2 Reinforced
Concrete, Light Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes
(Clauses 6.1.1,6.1.2, 6.1.3, 7.3.2and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
mm Mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 25 6 0.59 0.16 10.05 15.08
100 25 6 0.59 0.18 10.05 15.08
150 25 6 0.59 0.24 10.79 16.19
200 25 6 0.59 0.38 11.77 17.66
225 25 6 0.59 0.46 12.26 18.39
250 25 6 0.59 0.58 12.55 18.83
300 30 8 0.78 0.79 13.48 20.22
350 32 8 0.78 1.13 14.46 21.69
400 32 8 0.78 1.49 15.45 23.18
450 35 8 0.78 1.97 16.18 24.27
500 35 8 0.78 2.46 17.16 25.74
600 45 8 0.78 3.47 18.88 28.32
700 50 8 1.22 4.60 20.35 30.53
800 50 8 1.22 6.71 21.57 32.36
900 55 8 1.22 9.25 23.80 34.20
1000 60 8 1.76 10.69 24.27 36.41
1100 65 8 176 12.74 25.50 38.25
1200 70 8 1.76 15.47 26.97 40.46
1400 75 12 2.64 20.57 29.42 44.13
1600 80 12 or 8+8 3.52 25.40 32.12 48.18
1800 90 12 or 8+8 3.52 32.74 35.06 52.59
2000 100 12+12 5.28 45.14 37.76 56.64
2200 110 12+12 5.28 56.37 40.21 60.32

Note:
1. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col.5
shall be increased to 140/125.
2. Soft grade mild steel wire for spirals may be used for pipes of internal
diameters 80mm, 100mm and 150 mm only be increasing weight to 140/84
3. The longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upto 3 m
effective length for higher diameter of pipes.
4. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcement shall be calculated by multiplying
the values given in col. 4 by the length of the pipe and then deducting for
the cover length provided at the two ends.

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-3 Reinforced

Concrete, Medium Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes
 (Clauses 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
Mm Mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 25 6 0.59 0.16 13.00 19.50
100 25 6 0.59 0.22 13.00 19.50
150 25 6 0.59 0.46 13.70 20.55
200 30 6 0.59 0.81 14.50 21.75
225 30 6 0.59 1.03 14.80 22.20
250 30 6 0.59 1.24 15.00 22.50
300 40 8 0.78 1.80 15.50 23.25
350 75 8 0.78 2.95 16.77 25.16
400 75 8 0.78 3.30 19.16 28.74
450 75 8 0.78 3.79 21.56 32.34
500 75 8 0.78 4.82 23.95 35.93
600 85 8 or 6+6 1.18 7.01 28.74 43.11
700 85 8 or 6+6 1.18 10.27 33.53 50.30
800 95 8 or 6+6 2.66 13.04 38.32 57.48
900 100 6+6 2.66 18.30 43.11 64.67
1000 115 6+6 2.66 21.52 47.90 71.85
1100 115 6+6 2.66 27.99 52.69 79.00
1200 120 8+8 3.55 33.57 57.48 86.22
1400 135 8+8 3.55 46.21 67.06 100.60
1600 140 8+8 3.55 65.40 76.64 114.96
1800 150 12+12 9.36 87.10 86.22 129.13
2000 170 12+12 9.36 97.90 95.80 143.20
2200 185 12+12 9.36 133.30 105.38 158.07
2400 200 12+12 14.88 146.61 114.96 172.44
2600 215 12+12 14.88 175.76 124.54 186.81

Note:
1. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col.5
shall be increased to 140/125.
2. the longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upt 3 m
effetive length for higher diameter of pipes.
3. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcement shall be calculated by multiplying
the values given in col. 4 by the length of the pipe and then deducting for
the cover length provided at the two ends.
4. Concrete for pipes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35
N/mm2 28 days.

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-3

UN-Reinforced Concrete, Medium Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes Made by Vibrated
Casting Process
(Clauses 5.5.1, 6.1.1, 6.3, and 8.1: and Table 20 )

INTERNAL DIAMETER OF MINIMUM BARREL WALL Strength Test Requirement

PIPES THICKNESS for Three Edge Bearing Test,
Ultimate Load
Mm Mm KN/linear metre
(1) (2) (3)
300 50 15.50
350 55 16.77
400 60 19.16
450 65 21.56
500 70 23.95
600 75 28.74
700 85 33.53
800 95 38.32
900 100 43.11
1000 115 47.90
1100 120 52.69
1200 125 57.48
1400 140 67.06
1600 165 76.64
1800 180 86.22

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-3 Reinforced

Concrete, Medium Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes Made by Vibrated Casting Process
(Clauses 5.5.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2.1, 6.1.3, 6.2.2, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
Mm Mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
 Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
300 50 8 0.78 1.53 15.50 23.25
350 55 8 0.78 1.58 16.77 25.16
400 60 8 0.78 1.60 19.16 28.74
450 65 8 0.78 1.90 21.56 32.34
500 70 8 0.78 2.00 23.95 35.93
600 75 8 or 6+6 1.18 2.20 28.74 43.11
700 85 8 or 6+6 1.18 4.87 33.53 50.30
800 95 8 or 6+6 2.66 6.87 38.32 57.48
900 100 6+6 2.66 1.15 43.11 64.67
1000 115 6+6 2.66 15.70 47.90 71.85
1100 120 6+6 2.66 19.61 52.69 79.00
1200 125 8+8 3.55 21.25 57.48 86.22
1400 140 8+8 3.55 30.00 67.06 100.60
1600 165 8+8 3.55 50.63 76.64 114.96
1800 180 12+12 9.36 64.19 86.22 129.13
2000 190 12+12 9.36 83.12 95.80 143.20
2200 210 12+12 9.36 105.53 105.40 158.07
2400 225 12+12 14.88 133.80 115.00 172.44
Note: Concrete for pipes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35
N/mm2 at 28 days

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-4 Reinforced

Concrete, Medium Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes
(Clauses 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
Mm Mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 25 6 0.59 0.24 22.1 33.15
100 25 6 0.59 0.36 22.1 33.15
150 25 6 0.59 0.74 23.3 34.95
200 30 6 0.59 1.30 24.6 36.90
225 30 6 0.59 1.64 25.2 37.80
 250 30 6 0.59 1.98 25.5 38.25
300 40 8 0.78 2.71 26.4 39.60
350 75 8 0.78 3.14 29.8 44.70
400 75 8 0.78 3.52 33.9 50.90
450 75 8 0.78 3.88 36.9 55.30
500 75 8 0.78 5.96 40.0 61.20
600 85 8 or 6+6 2.34 9.63 46.3 69.40
700 85 8 or 6+6 3.44 14.33 52.2 78.30
800 95 8 or 6+6 3.44 21.20 59.3 89.10
900 100 6+6 3.44 27.13 66.3 99.40
1000 115 6+6 6.04 35.48 72.6 108.90
1100 115 6+6 6.04 43.76 80.4 120.60
1200 120 8+8 6.04 53.07 88.3 132.40
1400 135 8+8 9.36 77.62 104.2 156.40
1600 140 8+8 9.36 108.97 119.6 179.50
1800 150 12+12 14.88 150.22 135.3 203.00
2000 170 12+12 14.88 151.79 135.3 203.00
2200 185 12+12 14.88 160.90 142.2 213.30
2400 200 12+12 14.88 216.96 155.0 232.50
2600 215 12+12 14.88 258.93 166.7 250.00

Note:
1. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col.5
shall be increased to 140/125.
2. the longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upt 3 m
effetive length for higher diameter of pipes.
3. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcement shall be calculated by multiplying
the values given in col. 4 by the length of the pipe and then deducting for
the cover length provided at the two ends.
4. Concrete for pipes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35
N/mm2 28 days.

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-3

UN-Reinforced Concrete, Medium Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes Made by Vibrated
Casting Process
(Clauses 5.5.1, 6.1.1, 6.3, and 8.1: and Table 20 )

INTERNAL DIAMETER OF MINIMUM BARREL WALL Strength Test Requirement

PIPES THICKNESS for Three Edge Bearing Test,
Ultimate Load
Mm Mm KN/linear metre
(1) (2) (3)
300 50 26.4
350 55 29.8
400 60 33.9
 450 65 36.9
500 70 40.0
600 75 46.3
700 85 52.2
800 95 59.3
900 100 66.3
1000 115 72.6
1100 125 80.4
1200 135 88.3
1400 155 104.2
1600 180 119.6
1800 205 135.3

Note : Concrete for pipes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 50

N/mm2 at 28 days
Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-4 Reinforced
Concrete, Heavy Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes Made by Vibrated Casting Process
(Clauses 5.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2.1, 6.1.3,6.2.2, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
mm mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
300 50 8 0.78 1.53 26.4 38.6
350 55 8 0.78 161 29.8 44.7
400 60 8 0.78 1.97 33.9 50.9
450 65 8 0.78 3.36 36.9 55.3
500 70 8 0.78 5.56 40.0 61.2
600 75 8 or 6+6 2.34 8.50 46.3 69.4
700 85 8 or 6+6 3.44 12.78 52.2 78.3
800 95 8 or 6+6 3.44 16.72 59.3 89.1
900 100 6+6 3.44 20.92 66.3 99.4
1000 115 8+8 6.04 26.70 72.6 108.9
1100 120 8+8 6.04 35.60 80.4 120.6
1200 125 8+8 6.04 42.42 88.3 132.4
1400 140 8+8 9.36 53.39 104.2 156.4
1600 165 12+12 9.36 79.92 119.6 179.5
1800 180 12+12 14.88 85.75 135.3 203.0
2000 190 12+12 14.88 108.00 135.3 203.0

Note : Concrete for pipes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35

N/mm2 at 28 days
Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class NP-4 Reinforced
Concrete, Heavy Duty, Non-Pressure Pipes Made by Vibrated Casting Process
(Clauses 5.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2.1, 6.1.3,6.2.2, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel wall Reinforcements

diameter of thickness Longitudinal Mild steel or Spirals, Hard
pipes hard drawn steel drawn steel
Mm Mm Minimum Kg/Linear Meter Kg/Linear meter
number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
80 25 6 0.59 0.16
100 25 6 0.59 0.22
150 25 6 0.59 0.46
200 25 6 0.59 0.79
225 25 6 0.59 1.00
250 25 6 0.59 1.22
300 30 8 0.78 1.75
350 32 8 0.78 2.37
400 32 8 0.78 3.05
450 35 8 0.78 3.86
500 35 8 0.78 4.72
600 40 8 0.78 6.79
700 40 8 1.22 9.15
800 45 8 1.22 11.94
900 50 8 1.22 15.12
1000 55 8 1.76 18.64
1100 60 8 1.76 22.88
1200 65 8 1.76 26.82

Note:
1. Strength requirements for pressure pipes shall be the same as for NP2 class
pipes.
2. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col. 5
shall be increased to 140/125.
3. Soft grade mild steel wire for spirals may be used for pipes of internal
diameter 80mm, 100mm and 150mm only by increasing weight to 140/84
4. The longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upto 3 m
effective length for higher diameter of pipes.
5. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcements shall be calculated by
multiplying the values given in Table 4 by the length of the pipe and then
deducting for the cover length provided at two ends

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class P-2 Reinforced

Concrete, Pressure Pipes Safe for 0.2 MPa Pressure Test
(Clauses 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3,6.2.2, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )

Internal Barrel wall Reinforcements

diameter of thickness Longitudinal Mild steel or Spirals, Hard
pipes hard drawn steel drawn steel
Mm Mm Minimum Kg/Linear Meter Kg/Linear meter
number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
80 25 6 0.59 0.29
100 25 6 0.59 0.45
150 25 6 0.59 0.93
200 30 6 0.59 1.63
225 30 6 0.59 2.03
250 30 6 0.59 2.47
300 40 8 0.78 3.61
350 45 8 0.78 4.88
400 50 8 0.78 6.36
450 50 8 0.78 7.96
500 55 8 0.78 9.80
600 65 8 1.76 14.10
700 70 8 1.76 21.90
800 80 8 or 6+6 2.66 28.54
900 90 8 or 6+6 2.66 35.92
1000 100 6+6 2.66 43.48

Note:
1. Strength requirements for pressure pipes shall be the same as for NP2 class
pipes.
2. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col. 5
shall be increased to 140/125.
3. Soft grade mild steel wire for spirals may be used for pipes of internal
diameter 80mm, 100mm and 150mm only by increasing weight to 140/84
4. The longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upto 3 m
effective length for higher diameter of pipes.
5. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcements shall be calculated by
multiplying the values given in Table 4 by the length of the pipe and then
deducting for the cover length provided at two ends

Design and Strength Requirements of Concrete Pipes of Class P-3 Reinforced

Concrete, Pressure Pipes Safe for 0.2n MPa Pressure Test
(Clauses 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.2.2, 7.3.2 and 8.1: and Table 20 )
Internal diameter Barrel wall Reinforcements
of pipes thickness Longitudinal hard Mild steel or steel Spirals, Hard
drawn drawn steel
Mm Mm Minimum Kg/Linear Meter Kg/Linear meter
number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
80 25 6 0.59 0.45
100 25 6 0.59 0.66
150 25 6 0.59 1.39
200 35 6 0.59 2.49
225 35 6 0.59 3.10
250 35 6 0.59 3.78
300 45 8 0.78 5.49
350 55 8 0.78 7.52
400 60 8 0.78 9.78
450 70 8 0.78 13.06
500 75 8 0.78 15.96
600 90 8 or 6+6 2.66 22.63
700 105 8 or 6+6 2.66 30.82
800 120 6+6 2.66 39.46

Note:
1. Strength requirements for pressure pipes shall be the same as for NP2 class
pipes.
2. If mild steel is use for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col. 5
shall be increased to 140/125.
3. Soft grade mild steel wire for spirals may be used for pipes of internal
diameter 80mm, 100mm and 150mm only by increasing weight to 140/84
4. The longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes upto 2.5
m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upto 3 m
effective length for higher diameter of pipes.
5. Total mass of longitudinal reinforcements shall be calculated by
multiplying the values given in Table 4 by the length of the pipe and then
deducting for the cover length provided at two ends

Weight of Spirals (Hard Drawn Steel) in Socket of R/R Joint RCC Pipes of
Different Classes (Kg/Number)
(Clause 6.3)
Internal NP2 class NP3 class NP4 class NP1 class NP2 class NP3 class
diameter of
Pipes
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
100 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09
 150 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.15
200 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.14 0.21 0.35
225 0.15 0.15 0.26 0.15 0.26 0.43
250 0.16 0.16 0.31 0.16 0.31 0.51
300 0.45 0.45 0.53 0.45 0.53 0.84
350 0.51 0.64 0.64 0.51 0.74 1.24
400 0.56 0.71 0.71 0.56 0.99 1.66
450 0.63 0.76 0.76 0.63 1.23 2.26
500 0.68 0.87 1.08 0.68 1.57 2.85
600 0.81 1.00 2.12 1.52 2.88 4.74
700 0.92 2.16 3.02 1.79 3.96 6.79
800 1.14 2.87 4.67 2.04 6.28 9.99
900 1.50 4.06 6.03 2.63 8.29 -
1000 1.91 - - 3.33 1.29 -
1100 2.34 - - 4.08 - -
1200 2.80 - - 4.90 - -
1400 3.82 - - - - -
1600 5.64 - - - - -
1800 7.25 - - - - -
2000 11.78 - - - - -
2200 12.88 - - - - -

Notes:
1. Soft grade mild steel wire for spirals reinforcement, the weight specified
above shall be increased to 140/125
2. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be proportional to the length of socket
as given in Table 2 to 11.

Design Requirement of Reinforced Concrete Collar for Pipes of Class NP2

(Clause 6.3 & 8.1)
Internal COLLAR DIMENSIONS REINFORCEMENTS
diameter Minimum Minimum Minmum Longitudinal Mild Spirals,
of Pipes Caulking Thickness Length Hard drawn Steel, Hard
Space Steel drawn drawn
mm mm mm Minimum steel steel
Number Weight
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.07
100 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.08
150 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.10
200 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.12
225 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.14
250 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.16
300 16 30 150 8 0.11 0.22
 350 16 32 150 8 0.11 0.25
400 16 32 150 8 0.11 0.27
450 16 35 200 8 0.15 0.40
500 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.60
600 19 40 200 8 0.15 0.70
700 19 40 200 8 0.23 1.05
800 19 45 200 8 0.23 1.85
900 19 50 200 8 0.23 2.05
1000 19 55 200 8 0.33 2.25
1100 19 60 200 8 0.33 3.09
1200 19 65 200 8 0.33 4.11
1400 19 75 200 12 0.50 5.08
1600 19 80 200 12 or 8+8 0.67 6.55
1800 19 90 200 12 or 8+8 0.67 9.00
2000 19 100 200 12+12 1.00 12.15
2200 19 110 200 12+12 1.00 13.30
Notes:
1. If mild steel is used for spirals reinforcement, the weight specified under
col. 7 shall be increased by a factor 140/125
2. Soft grade mild steel wire may be used as reinforcement for collars of pipes
of nominal internal diameter upto 250mm only by increasing the weight by
a factor 140/84
Where only soft grade mild steel wire is used for making collar cages, the
weight of col 6 and col 7 multiplied by 140/84. This is allowed as a process
requirement.
3. Internal diameter of collar to suite the actual diameter of pipes with
minimum caulking space as given in col 2.
Design Requirement of Reinforced Concrete Collar for Pipes
of Class NP2 and NP4
(Clause 6.3 & 8.1)

Internal COLLAR DIMENSIONS REINFORCEMENTS

diameter Minimum Minimum Minmum Longitudinal Mild Spirals,
of Pipes Caulking Thickness Length Hard drawn Steel, hard
Space Steel drawn drawn
mm mm mm Minimum steel steel
Number Weight
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
80 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.07
100 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.08
150 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.10
200 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.12
225 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.14
250 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.16
300 16 30 150 8 0.11 0.22
350 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.40
400 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.50
450 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.60
500 19 40 200 8 0.15 0.70
600 19 40 200 8 0.23 1.05
 700 19 45 200 8 0.23 1.85
800 19 50 200 8 0.23 2.05
900 19 55 200 8 0.33 2.25
1000 19 60 200 8 0.33 3.09
1100 19 65 200 8 0.33 4.11
1200 19 75 200 12 0.50 5.08
1400 19 80 200 12 or 8+8 0.67 6.55
1600 19 90 200 12 or 8+8 0.67 9.00
1800 19 100 200 12+12 1.00 12.15
2000 19 110 200 12+12 1.00 13.30

SPECIFICATION FOR PRECAST CONCRETE PIPES

(WITH AND WITHOUT REINFORCEMENTS)
Table 2: Design and strength test requirement of concrete pipes of class NP2
reinforced concrete, light duty, non-pressure
Internal Barre Collar Thickness Reinforcement Strength test
diameter of l requirement for 3-
pipes wall edge testing test
Norma Actua thick Min Mini Mini Longitudina Spirals hard Load Ultimat
l l ness Caulkin mum mum l mild steel drawn steel produce e load
g thick lengt or hard for pipes for 0.25
ness h drawn steel collar mm
thick
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Kg/ Kg/ Kg/ Kg/ Kg/
near Near No inear inear
met metr metre metre
er e
150 150 25 13 25 150 6 0.33 0.24 0.19 10.79 16.19
300 300 30 16 30 150 8 0.78 0.79 0.7.1 13.49 20.22
450 450 35 19 35 200 8 0.78 1.17 1.48 16.18 24.27
600 590 45 19 40 200 8 0.78 3.47 1.8.9 18.88 28.32
900 890 55 19 50 200 8 1.22 1.25 3.26 22.00 34.20
1000 990 60 19 55 200 8 1.76 10.69 3.6.4 24.27 36.41
1200 1190 70 18 65 200 8 1.76 15.47 4.52 26.97 40.16

Note :
1. If mild steel is used for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col
9 & 10 shall be increased to 140/125
2. Soft grade mild steel wire for spiral may be used for pipes of internal
diameters effective length 80mm, 100mm and 150mm only by increasing
weight to 140/84
3. The longitudinal reinforcement given in this table is valid for pipes up to
2m effective length for internal diameter of pipe upto 250mm and upto 3m
in effective length for higher diameter pipes.

Reinforced concrete, light duty, non-pressure Pipes

Internal Barrel REINFORCEMENTS STRENGTH

Diameter wall REQUIREMENTS
of Pipes thickness Longitudinal, Mild steel Spirals, For three Bearing
Hard or steel hard draw edge load Test
steel to produce Utltimate
0.25 mm Load
Crack
KN/linear
Meter
mm mm KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear KN/ Linear
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
150 25 6 0.33 0.46 13.70 20.55
300 40 8 0.78 1.80 15.50 23.25
450 70 8 0.78 3.79 21.56 32.34
600 85 6+6 1.18 7.01 28.74 40.11
900 100 6+6 2.66 18.30 43.11 64.67
1000 115 6+6 2.66 21.52 47.00 71.85
1200 120 8+8 3.55 33.57 57.48 86.22

Note:
1. The actual diameter is to be declared by the manufacturer and the tolerance
is to be applied on the declared diameter (See also 0.3.0).
2. Minimum thickness and minimum length of collars shall be the same as
that for the next higher size available in NP2 class pipes corresponding to
the calculated linear diameter of collars, effective length for internal
diameter of pipe upto 250mm and up to 3m effective length for higher
diameter pipes.
3. Concrete for pipes above 1800mm nominal diameter shall have a min.
compressive strength of 35N/mm at 28 days and 2 min,. cement content of
400 Kg/m2
4. If mild steel is used for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified in col. 5
shall be increased to 140/125

STONE WARE PIPES

TESTS
1. TESTING FACILITIES
The manufacturer shall at his premises and at his own cost provide the
necessary gauges, supply and prepare all test pieces and supply all labour
and apparatus for testing which may necessary for carrying out the tests as
required by this standard.
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
When subjected to the hydraulic test, straight pipes shall withstand an
internal hydraulic test pressure of 0.15 MPs, on the barrels and fitting
covered in Section A and 0.075 MPa for fitting covered in Section B, without
showing signs of injury or leakages. The pressure shall be applied on pipes
and fittings at a rate not exceeding 0.0075 MPa in 5 s and full pressure shall
be maintained for at least 5 s. Care shall be taken to ensure that all air is
expelled before the test commenced.
3. ABSORPTION TEST
 The test pieces for testing shall be taken from the body of the pipe or fitting
but not from within 150mm of the end. Each test piece shall be of the whole
thickness of wall of the pipe of fitting and shall have two glazed surfaces
each having an area of not less than 50 cm 2 and not more than 130cm2. The
test pieces shall be cleaned by wire brush to dislodge any loose particles
which may increase loss of mass during boiling. The test pieces shall be
dried at a temperature not less than 1500C until no further loss of mass is
noted and cooled in a dessicater at the room temperature and the specimen
weighed to an accuracy of 0.1g. The test piece may be suitably suspended in
cold distilled water by means of thread so that the test piece may not strike
against each other in the container and incur loss in mass and the water in
the container shall then be brought to the boiling point. The water shall be
maintained at that temperature for 1 h and after it had been allowed to cool
to room temperature, the test piece shall be removed carefully, wiped with
a dry cloth and then the mass determined. The percentage increase in mass
of each test piece by absorption of water shall not exceed the following
values:
Thickness of pipe or fitting Increase in Mass
Percentage Minimum
Upto and including 20 6
Over 20 and upto 25 7
Over 25 and upto 32 8
Over 32 and upto 38 9
Over 38 10
7.4 TEST FOR RESISTANCE
Pipes and fittings shall be tested for acid resistance in accordance with the
procedures given in Annexure. A. the loss in mass shall not exceed 2.5
percent.
7.5 TEST FOR ALKALI RESISTANCE
 Pipes and fittings shall be tested to the action of magnesium sulphate, in
accordance with the procedure given in Annex. B. There shall be no
evidence of pitting, softening, spalling or cracking in the pipe or fitting after
the test.
7.6 CRUSHING STRENGTH TEST
When tested along the full length of the pipe barrel from shoulder to spigot
in accordance with the Annexure C, the crushing strength of each class of
pipe or pipe sections shall not be less than the values given below:

Internal Diameter Class

mm SP1 SP2 SP3
(1) KN/m kN/m kN/m
Upto 150 16 18 21
200-300 16 21 24
350-450 16 26 32
500-800 16 32 60

Dimension of Barrels and Sockets

Clauses 10.1, 11.1, 13.1, 13.1.1, 13.2, 114 & 18)
S.No Diameter Class Mean Internal Excess Length of
Thickness of Depth of Shoulder Grooving
Barrel & Socket Socket Measurement Spigot
Min Min Min Min
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 100 SP1 12 50 10 75
SP2 14 55 11 82.5
SP3 18 60 14 90
ii) 150 SP1 15 57 11 85.5
16 60 12 90
20 62 12 93
iii) 200 SP2 16 63 12 94.7
18 65 13 97.5
22 68 15 102
iv) 230 SP3 19 63 12 94.5
 21 65 14 97.5
24 68 16 102
v) 250 SP1 20 70 16 105
22 66 17 99
26 69 18 103.5
vi) 300 SP2 25 70 16 105
24 72 18 108
28 74 19 111
vii) 350 SP3 30 75 16 112.5
32 76 20 114
34 76 20 114
viii) 400 SP1 35 75 16 112.5
36 77 20 115.5
38 77 20 115.5
ix) 450 SP2 37 76 16 114
40 78 20 117
45 79 20 118.5
x) 500 SP3 40 80 19 120
45 85 20 127.5
50 90 20 135
xi) 600 SP1 43 90 19 135
50 95 22 142.5
55 100 22 150
xii) 700 SP2 50 95 20 142.5
55 100 23 150
60 110 23 165
xiii) 800 SP3 55 100 24 150
65 110 26 165
75 120 27 180

Dimension of One-Quarter Bends

(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in mm
S.No Internal SHORT MEDIUM LONG
Diameter r a r a r a
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) 100 92 140 150 190 215 255
ii) 150 150 190 190 230 230 265
iii) 200 - - 215 265 - -
iv) 230 - - 215 265 - -
v) 250 - - 255 305 - -
vi) 300 - - 255 305 - -
vii) 350 - - 390 465 - -
viii) 400 - - 420 495 - -
ix) 450 - - 455 530 - -
x) 500 - - 490 570 - -
xi) 600 - - 590 640 - -
xii) 700 - - 600 700 - -
xiii) 800 - - 650 800 - -
 Dimension of One-Quarter Bends
(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in mm
S.No Internal Diameter Short Medium
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) 100 250 500
ii) 150 380 530
iii) 200 - -
iv) 230 - -
v) 250 - -
vi) 300 - -
vii) 350 - -
viii) 400 - -
ix) 450 - -
x) 500 - -
xi) 600 - -
xii) 700 - -
xiii) 800 - -

Dimension of One-Sixteenth Bends

(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in millimeters
S.No Internal Diameter
(1) (2) (3)
i) 100 750
ii) 150 900
iii) 200 1050
iv) 230 1050
v) 250 1050
vi) 300 1200
vii) 350 1500
viii) 400 1800
ix) 450 2150
x) 500 2600
 xi) 600 3050
xii) 700 3600
xiii) 800 4200

Dimension of One-Quarter Taper Bends

(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in millimeters
S.No Internal Diameter
D D R A
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i. 100 150 150 190
ii. 150 250 190 250

Dimension of One-Eighth Taper Bends

(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in millimeters
S.No Internal Diameter
D D R
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i. 100 150 380
ii. 150 250 460

Dimension of Half-Section One-Quarter Channel Bends

(Clause 17)
All dimensions in mm
S.No Internal SHORT MEDIUM LONG
Diameter r a r a r a
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) 100 90 140 150 190 215 255
ii) 150 180 190 190 230 230 265
iii) 200 - - 215 265 - -
iv) 230 - - 215 265 - -
v) 250 - - 255 305 - -
vi) 300 - - 255 305 - -
vii) 350 - - 390 465 - -
viii) 400 - - 420 495 - -
ix) 450 - - 455 530 - -
x) 500 - - 490 570 - -
xi) 600 - - 550 640 - -
xii) 700 - - 600 700 - -
xiii) 800 - - 650 800 - -
 Dimension of One-Quarter Bends
(Clause 13.1)
All dimensions in mm
S.No Internal Short Medium Long
Diameter
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 100 250 350 500
ii) 150 380 460 530
iii) 200 - 530 -
iv) 230 - 630 -
v) 250 - 610 -
vi) 300 - 610 -
vii) 350 - 640 -
viii) 400 - 670 -
ix) 450 - 700 -
x) 500 - 735 -
xi) 600 - 785 -
xii) 700 - 856 -
xiii) 800 - 1000 -

Dimension of One-Sixteenth Channel Bends

(Clause 17)
All dimensions in millimeters
S.No Internal Diameter
(1) (2) (3)
i) 100 750
ii) 150 900
iii) 200 1050
iv) 230 1050
v) 250 1050
vi) 300 1200
vii) 350 1500
viii) 400 1800
ix) 450 2150
x) 500 2600
xi) 600 3050
xii) 700 3600
xiii) 800 4200

Dimension of Channel Interceptors

(Clause 17)
All dimensions in mm
 S.No Internal Diameter A B C E F G
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) 100 470 65 50 100 20 75
ii) 150 620 75 65 100 20 75
iii) 230 790 75 65 100 20 90

Dimension of Round Gully Traps

(Clause 17)
All dimension in millimeters

S.No Type Size A B C d D D E F G

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
i. 100x200 330 165 100 100 100 75 - - 360
P 125x100 335 185 100 125 100 75 - - 340
150x100 343 200 100 150 100 75 - - 385
ii. Q 125x100 330 175 100 125 100 - 75 - 140
100x100 305 165 100 100 100 - - 120 360
iii. S 150x100 343 200 100 150 100 - - 115 385
150x150 495 405 150 150 150 - - 110 460

Dimension of Square Mouth Gully Traps

(Clause 17)
All dimension are in millimeters

S.No Type Size A B C d D D E F G

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
i. 100x100 305 175 100 100 100 65 - - 330
P 125x100 265 165 100 125 100 60 - - 345
150x100 330 165 100 150 100 75 - - 346
ii. Q 180x100 320 200 100 180 100 65 - - 380
180x150 405 270 100 180 100 75 - - 520
iii. S 125x100 330 165 100 125 100 - 80 - 345
125x100 290 165 100 125 100 - - 100 345
150x100 330 165 100 150 100 - - 115 346
180x150 445 275 150 180 150 - - 125 520

Grades & Types

Manhole covers and frames shall be of the following four grades and types:
Grade Grade Designation Type/Shape of cover
Light duty L.D-2.5 Rectangular, Square. Circular
Medium Duty MD-10 Rectangular, Circular
Heavy Duty HD-20 Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole)
Square, Circular & Lamphole
Extra Heavy Duty EHD-35 Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole)
Square, Circular
L.D-2.5 Rectangular, Square or Circular Type
Suitable for use within residential and institutional complexes/areas with
pedestrian but occasional light motor vehicle traffic. These are also used for
‘inspection Chambers’.
MD-10 Circular or Rectangular Types:
Suitable for use in service lanes/roads, on pavements for use under medium duty
vehicular traffic including for car parking areas.
HD-20 Circular, Lamphole, Square or Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole) Types
Suitable for use in institutional/commercial areas/carriage ways/city trunk
roads/bus terminals with heavy duty vehicular traffic and where the manhole
chambers are located in between the pavement and middle of the road.
EHD-35 Circular, Square or Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole) Types
Suitable for use on carriage ways in commercial/industrial/port areas/near
warehouses, where frequent loading and unloading of trucks/trailers are
common. With slow to fast moving vehicular traffic of the types having wheels
loads up to 115 kN irrespective of the location of the manhole chambers.

Dimension of frames
(Clause 5.2)
All dimension in millimeters
Grade/Dimension Description Clear B C D E F
Opening Min Min
in frame
 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
L.D-2.5 Light duty 450+450 50 50 50 50 566
Rectangular
L.D-2.5 Light duty 450+450 50 50 50 50 566x566
square 400+400 50 50 50 50
L.D-2.5 Ligyt duty 370 50 50 50 50 486
circular 560 50 50 50 50 676
500 50 50 50 50 616
450 50 50 50 50 566
MD-10 Medium 450+600 70 70 70 70 570x720
duty
rectangular
MD-10 Medium 450 70 70 70 70 570
duty circular 500 70 70 70 70 620
560 70 70 70 70 680
600 70 70 70 70 720
HD-20 Heavy duty 900x450 90 75 75 75 1080x620
rectangular
HD-20 Heavy duty 560x560 90 75 75 75 740x740
square
HD-20 Heavy duty 450 90 75 75 75 630
circular 500 90 75 75 75 680
560 90 75 75 75 740
600 90 75 75 75 780
HD-20 Heavy duty 350 90 75 75 75 530
lamphole
EHD-35 Extra heavy 900x560 100 75 75 75 1078x738
duty
rectangular
EHD-35 Extra heavy 560x560 100 75 75 75 738x738
duty square
EHD-35 Extra heavy 450 100 75 75 75 628
duty circular 500 100 75 75 75 676
560 100 75 75 75 738
600 100 75 75 75 778

Notes:
Tolerance of “C” shall be 45mm, tolerance on A,B,D and E shall be +5 -0mm
For facility of removing the manhole cover suitable upward taper not more than 5 0
may be provided to the inner periphery of the frame
If required for the removal of the moulds suitable taper not more than 5 0 can be
given at the lower inner periphery of the frame (see figure)
 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
Submersible pump
From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia

A submersible pump (or electric submersible pump (ESP)) is a device which has

a hermetically sealed motor close-coupled to the pump body. The whole assembly is
submerged in the fluid to be pumped. The main advantage of this type of pump is
that it prevents pump cavitation, a problem associated with a high elevation
difference between pump and the fluid surface. Submersible pumps push fluid to the
surface as opposed to jet pumps having to pull fluids. Submersibles are more efficient
than jet pumps.
Contents

  [hide] 

1 Working principle

2 Applications

o 2.1 ESP usage in oil wells

3 See also

4 References

5 External links

[edit]Working principle

ESP systems are effective for pumping produced fluids to surface.

The submersible pumps used in ESP installations are multistage centrifugal pumps
operating in a vertical position. Although their constructional and operational
features underwent a continuous evolution over the years, their basic operational
principle remained the same. Produced liquids, after being subjected to great
centrifugal forces caused by the high rotational speed of the impeller, lose their kinetic
energy in the diffuser where a conversion of kinetic to pressure energy takes place.
This is the main operational mechanism of radial and mixed flow pumps.
The pump shaft is connected to the gas separator or the protector by a mechanical
coupling at the bottom of the pump. Well fluids enter the pump through an intake
screen and are lifted by the pump stages.Other parts include the radial bearings
(bushings) distributed along the length of the shaft providing radial support to the
pump shaft turning at high rotational speeds. An optional thrust bearing takes up
part of the axial forces arising in the pump but most of those forces are absorbed by
the protector’s thrust bearing.

Applications
Submersible pumps are found in many applications. Single stage pumps are used for
drainage, sewage pumping, general industrial pumping and slurry pumping. They
are also popular with aquarium filters. Multiple stage submersible pumps are
typically lowered down a borehole and used for water abstraction, water wells and
in oil wells.

Special attention to the type of ESP is required when using certain types of liquids.
ESP's commonly used on board naval vessels cannot be used to dewater contaminated
flooded spaces. These use a 440 volt A/C motor that operates a small centrifugal
pump. It can also be used out of the water, taking suction with a 2-1/2 inch non-
collapsible hose. The pumped liquid is circulated around the motor for cooling
purposes. There is a possibility that the gasoline will leak into the pump causing a fire
or destroying the pump, so hot water and flammable liquids should be avoided.

[edit]ESP usage in oil wells

Submersible pumps are used in oil production to provide a relatively efficient form of
"artificial lift", able to operate across a broad range of flow rates and depths. [1][2] By
decreasing the pressure at the bottom of the well (by lowering bottomhole flowing
pressure, or increasing drawdown), significantly more oil can be produced from the
well when compared with natural production.[citation needed] The pumps are typically
electrically powered and referred to as Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP). [citation needed]

ESP systems consist of both surface components (housed in the production facility, for
example an oil platform) and sub-surface components (found in the well hole).
Surface components include the motor controller (often a variable speed controller),
surface cables and transformers. Subsurface components typically include the pump,
motor, seal and cables. A gas separator is sometimes installed. [1]
The pump itself is a multi-stage unit with the number of stages being determined by
the operating requirements. Each stage consists of a driven impeller and a diffuser
which directs flow to the next stage of the pump. Pumps come in diameters from
90mm (3.5 inches) to 254mm (10 inches) and vary between 1 metre (3 ft) and 8.7
metres (29 ft) in length. The motor used to drive the pump is typically a three phase,
squirrel cage induction motor, with a nameplate power rating in the range 7.5 kW to
560 kW (at 60 Hz).[1]

New varieties of ESP can include a water/oil separator which permits the water to be
reinjected into the reservoir without the need to lift it to the surface. There are at least
15 brands of oilfield esps used throughout the world. Until recently, ESPs had been
highly costly to install due to the requirement of an electric cable downhole. This
cable had to be wrapped around jointed tubing and connected at each joint.
New coiled tubing umbilicals allow for both the piping and electric cable to deployed
with a single conventional coiled tubing unit.

The ESP system consists of a number of components that turn a staged series of
centrifugal pumps to increase the pressure of the well fluid and push it to the surface.
The energy to turn the pump comes from a high-voltage (3 to 5 kV) alternating-
current source to drive a special motor that can work at high temperatures of up
to 300 °F (149 °C) and high pressures of up to 5,000 psi (34 MPa), from deep wells of
up to 12,000 feet (3.7 km) deep with high energy requirements of up to about 1000
horsepower (750 kW). ESPs have dramatically lower efficiencies with significant
fractions of gas, greater than about 10% volume at the pump intake. Given their high
rotational speed of up to 4000 rpm (67 Hz) and tight clearances, they are not very
tolerant of solids such as sand.

Sewage pumping
Sewage pumping is normally done by a submersible pump.

This became popular in the early 1960s, when a guide-rail system was developed to
lift the submersible pump out of the pump station for repair, and ended the dirty and
sometimes dangerous task of sending people into the sewage or wet pit. Growth of
the submersible pump for sewage pumping since has been dramatic, as an increasing
number of specifiers and developers learned of their advantages.

Three classes of submersible pumps exist:

 Smaller submersible pumps, used in domestic and light commercial applications,

normally handle up to 55mm spherical solids and range from 0.75kW to 2.2kW.
 Larger submersible pumps, handle 65mm and larger solids and normally have a
minimum of 80mm discharge. They are generally used in municipal and
industrial applications for pumping sewage and all types of industrial
wastewater.
 Submersible chopper pumps, which are used to handle larger concentrations of
solids and/or tougher solids that conventional sewage pumps cannot handle.
Chopper pumps are generally used in municipal and industrial wastewater
applications and provide clog-free operation by macerating those solids that
might clog other types of submersible pumps.
Submersible pumps are normally used in a packaged pump station where drainage
by gravity is not possible.

Vertical type sewage pumps have also been used for many years. They have the
motor above the floor so work on the motor can be done without entering the sewage
pit
 RAIN

WATER

HARVESTING

Rainwater harvesting is a technology used for collecting and storing rainwater

from rooftops, the land surface or rock catchments using simple techniques such
as jars and pots as well as more complex techniques such as underground check
dams. The techniques usually found in Asia and Africa arise from practices
employed by ancient civilizations within these regions and still serve as a major
source of drinking water supply in rural areas. Commonly used systems are
constructed of three principal components; namely, the catchment area, the
collection device, and the conveyance system.

A) Catchment Areas

 Rooftop catchments: In the most basic form of this technology, rainwater is

collected in simple vessels at the edge of the roof. Variations on this basic
approach include collection of rainwater in gutters which drain to the
collection vessel through down-pipes constructed for this purpose, and/or
the diversion of rainwater from the gutters to containers for settling
particulates before being conveyed to the storage container for the domestic
use. As the rooftop is the main catchment area, the amount and quality of
rainwater collected depends on the area and type of roofing material.
Reasonably pure rainwater can be collected from roofs constructed with
galvanized corrugated iron, aluminium or asbestos cement sheets, tiles and
slates, although thatched roofs tied with bamboo gutters and laid in proper
slopes can produce almost the same amount of runoff less expensively
(Gould, 1992). However, the bamboo roofs are least suitable because of
possible health hazards. Similarly, roofs with metallic paint or other
coatings are not recommended as they may impart tastes or colour to the
collected water. Roof catchments should also be cleaned regularly to
remove dust, leaves and bird droppings so as to maintain the quality of the
product water (see figure 1).
 Land surface catchments: Rainwater harvesting using ground or land
surface catchment areas is less complex way of collecting rainwater. It
involves improving runoff capacity of the land surface through various
techniques including collection of runoff with drain pipes and storage of
collected water. Compared to rooftop catchment techniques, ground
catchment techniques provide more opportunity for collecting water from a
larger surface area. By retaining the flows (including flood flows) of small
creeks and streams in small storage reservoirs (on surface or underground)
created by low cost (e.g., earthen) dams, this technology can meet water
demands during dry periods. There is a possibility of high rates of water
loss due to infiltration into the ground, and, because of the often marginal
quality of the water collected, this technique is mainly suitable for storing
water for agricultural purposes. Various techniques available for increasing
the runoff within ground catchment areas involve: i) clearing or altering
vegetation cover, ii) increasing the land slope with artificial ground cover,
and iii) reducing soil permeability by the soil compaction and application of
chemicals (see figure 2).
 Clearing or altering vegetation cover: Clearing vegetation from the ground
can increase surface runoff but also can induce more soil erosion. Use of
dense vegetation cover such as grass is usually suggested as it helps to both
maintain an high rate of runoff and minimize soil erosion.
 Increasing slope: Steeper slopes can allow rapid runoff of rainfall to the
collector. However, the rate of runoff has to be controlled to minimize soil
erosion from the catchment field. Use of plastic sheets, asphalt or tiles along
with slope can further increase efficiency by reducing both evaporative
losses and soil erosion. The use of flat sheets of galvanized iron with timber
frames to prevent corrosion was recommended and constructed in the State
of Victoria, Australia, about 65 years ago (Kenyon, 1929; cited in UNEP,
1982).
 Soil compaction by physical means: This involves smoothing and
compacting of soil surface using equipment such as graders and rollers. To
increase the surface runoff and minimize soil erosion rates, conservation
bench terraces are constructed along a slope perpendicular to runoff flow.
The bench terraces are separated by the sloping collectors and provision is
made for distributing the runoff evenly across the field strips as sheet flow.
Excess flows are routed to a lower collector and stored (UNEP, 1982).
 Soil compaction by chemical treatments: In addition to clearing, shaping
and compacting a catchment area, chemical applications with such soil
treatments as sodium can significantly reduce the soil permeability. Use of
 aqueous solutions of a silicone-water repellent is another technique for
enhancing soil compaction technologies. Though soil permeability can be
reduced through chemical treatments, soil compaction can induce greater
rates of soil erosion and may be expensive. Use of sodium-based chemicals
may increase the salt content in the collected water, which may not be
suitable both for drinking and irrigation purposes.

B) Collection Devices

 Storage tanks: Storage tanks for collecting rainwater harvested using

guttering may be either above or below the ground. Precautions required in
the use of storage tanks include provision of an adequate enclosure to
minimize contamination from human, animal or other environmental
contaminants, and a tight cover to prevent algae growth and the breeding
of mosquitoes. Open containers are not recommended for collecting water
for drinking purposes. Various types of rainwater storage facilities can be
found in practice. Among them are cylindrical ferro cement tanks and
mortar jars. The reinforcement tank consists of a lightly reinforced concrete
base on which is erected a circular vertical cylinder with a 10 mm steel base.
This cylinder is further wrapped in two layers of light wire mesh to form
the frame of the tank. Mortar jars are large jar shaped vessels constructed
from wire reinforced mortar. The storage capacity needed should be
calculated to take into consideration the length of any dry spells, the
amount of rainfall, and the per capita water consumption rate. In most of
the Asian countries, the winter months are dry, sometimes for weeks on
end, and the annual average rainfall can occur within just a few days. In
such circumstances, the storage capacity should be large enough to cover
the demands of two to three weeks. For example, a three person household
should have a minimum capacity of 3 (Persons) x 90 (l) x 20 (days) = 5 400 l.
  Rainfall water containers: As an alternative to storage tanks, battery tanks
(i.e., interconnected tanks) made of pottery, ferro cement, or polyethylene
may be suitable. The polyethylene tanks are compact but have a large
storage capacity (ca. 1 000 to 2 000 l), are easy to clean and have many
openings which can be fitted with fittings for connecting pipes. In Asia, jars
made of earthen materials or ferro cement tanks are commonly used.
During the 1980s, the use of rainwater catchment technologies, especially
roof catchment systems, expanded rapidly in a number of regions,
including Thailand where more than ten million 2 m 3 ferrocement
rainwater jars were built and many tens of thousands of larger ferrocement
tanks were constructed between 1991 and 1993. Early problems with the jar
design were quickly addressed by including a metal cover using readily
available, standard brass fixtures. The immense success of the jar
programme springs from the fact that the technology met a real need, was
affordable, and invited community participation. The programme also
captured the imagination and support of not only the citizens, but also of
government at both local and national levels as well as community based
organizations, small-scale enterprises and donor agencies. The introduction
and rapid promotion of Bamboo reinforced tanks, however, was less
successful because the bamboo was attacked by termites, bacteria and
fungus. More than 50 000 tanks were built between 1986 and 1993 (mainly
in Thailand and Indonesia) before a number started to fail, and, by the late
1980s, the bamboo reinforced tank design, which had promised to provide
an excellent low-cost alternative to ferrocement tanks, had to be
abandoned.

C) Conveyance Systems

Conveyance systems are required to transfer the rainwater collected on the

rooftops to the storage tanks. This is usually accomplished by making
connections to one or more down-pipes connected to the rooftop gutters. When
selecting a conveyance system, consideration should be given to the fact that,
when it first starts to rain, dirt and debris from the rooftop and gutters will be
washed into the down-pipe. Thus, the relatively clean water will only be
available some time later in the storm. There are several possible choices to
selectively collect clean water for the storage tanks. The most common is the
down-pipe flap. With this flap it is possible to direct the first flush of water
flow through the down-pipe, while later rainfall is diverted into a storage tank.
When it starts to rain, the flap is left in the closed position, directing water to
the down-pipe, and, later, opened when relatively clean water can be collected.
A great disadvantage of using this type of conveyance control system is the
necessity to observe the runoff quality and manually operate the flap. An
alternative approach would be to automate the opening of the flap as described
below.

A funnel-shaped insert is integrated into the down-pipe system. Because the

upper edge of the funnel is not in direct contact with the sides of the down-
pipe, and a small gap exists between the down-pipe walls and the funnel,
water is free to flow both around the funnel and through the funnel. When it
first starts to rain, the volume of water passing down the pipe is small, and the
*dirty* water runs down the walls of the pipe, around the funnel and is
discharged to the ground as is normally the case with rainwater guttering.
However, as the rainfall continues, the volume of water increases and *clean*
water fills the down-pipe. At this higher volume, the funnel collects the clean
water and redirects it to a storage tank. The pipes used for the collection of
rainwater, wherever possible, should be made of plastic, PVC or other inert
substance, as the pH of rainwater can be low (acidic) and could cause
corrosion, and mobilization of metals, in metal pipes.
 In order to safely fill a rainwater storage tank, it is necessary to make sure that
excess water can overflow, and that blockages in the pipes or dirt in the water
do not cause damage or contamination of the water supply. The design of the
funnel system, with the drain-pipe being larger than the rainwater tank feed-
pipe, helps to ensure that the water supply is protected by allowing excess
water to bypass the storage tank. A modification of this design is shown in
Figure 5, which illustrates a simple overflow/bypass system. In this system, it
also is possible to fill the tank from a municipal drinking water source, so that
even during a prolonged drought the tank can be kept full. Care should be
taken, however, to ensure that rainwater does not enter the drinking water
distribution system.

  The history of rainwater harvesting in Asia can be traced back to about the 9th
or 10th Century and the small-scale collection of rainwater from roofs and
simple brush dam constructions in the rural areas of South and South-east
Asia. Rainwater collection from the eaves of roofs or via simple gutters into
traditional jars and pots has been traced back almost 2 000 years in Thailand
(Prempridi and Chatuthasry, 1982). Rainwater harvesting has long been used
in the Loess Plateau regions of China. More recently, however, about 40 000
well storage tanks, in a variety of different forms, were constructed between
1970 and 1974 using a technology which stores rainwater and storm water
runoff in ponds of various sizes. A thin layer of red clay is generally laid on the
bottom of the ponds to minimize seepage losses. Trees, planted at the edges of
the ponds, help to minimize evaporative losses from the ponds (UNEP, 1982).
Various levels of governmental and community involvement in the
development of rainwater harvesting technologies in different parts of Asia
were noted. In Thailand and the Philippines, both governmental and
household-based initiatives played key roles in expanding the use of this
technology, especially in water scarce areas such as northeast Thailand.
 Rainwater harvesting is an accepted freshwater augmentation technology in
Asia. While the bacteriological quality of rainwater collected from ground
catchments is poor, that from properly maintained rooftop catchment systems,
equipped with storage tanks having good covers and taps, is generally suitable
for drinking, and frequently meets WHO drinking water standards.
Notwithstanding, such water generally is of higher quality than most
traditional, and many of improved, water sources found in the developing
world. Contrary to popular beliefs, rather than becoming stale with extended
storage, rainwater quality often improves as bacteria and pathogens gradually
die off (Wirojanagud et al., 1989). Rooftop catchment, rainwater storage tanks
can provide good quality water, clean enough for drinking, as long as the
rooftop is clean, impervious, and made from non-toxic materials (lead paints
and asbestos roofing materials should be avoided), and located away from
over-hanging trees since birds and animals in the trees may defecate on the
roof.
Maintenance is generally limited to the annual cleaning of the tank and regular
inspection of the gutters and down-pipes. Maintenance typically consists of the
removal of dirt, leaves and other accumulated materials. Such cleaning should
take place annually before the start of the major rainfall season. However,
cracks in the storage tanks can create major problems and should be repaired
immediately. In the case of ground and rock catchments, additional care is
required to avoid damage and contamination by people and animals, and
proper fencing is required.
  Rainwater harvesting technologies are simple to install and operate. Local
people can be easily trained to implement such technologies, and construction
materials are also readily available. Rainwater harvesting is convenient in the
sense that it provides water at the point of consumption, and family members
have full control of their own systems, which greatly reduces operation and
maintenance problems. Running costs, also, are almost negligible. Water
collected from roof catchments usually is of acceptable quality for domestic
purposes. As it is collected using existing structures not specially constructed
for the purpose, rainwater harvesting has few negative environmental impacts
compared to other water supply project technologies. Although regional or
other local factors can modify the local climatic conditions, rainwater can be a
continuous source of water supply for both the rural and poor. Depending
upon household capacity and needs, both the water collection and storage
capacity may be increased as needed within the available catchment area.
Disadvantages of rainwater harvesting technologies are mainly due to the
limited supply and uncertainty of rainfall. Adoption of this technology
requires a *bottom up* approach rather than the more usual *top down*
approach employed in other water resources development projects. This may
make rainwater harvesting less attractive to some governmental agencies
tasked with providing water supplies in developing countries, but the
mobilization of local government and NGO resources can serve the same basic
role in the development of rainwater-based schemes as water resources
development agencies in the larger, more traditional public water supply
schemes.
The augmentation of municipal water supplies with harvested rainwater is
suited both urban and rural areas. The construction of cement jars or
provision of gutters does not require very highly skilled manpower.
The capital cost of rainwater harvesting systems is highly dependent on the
type of catchment, conveyance and storage tank materials used. However, the
cost of harvested rainwater in Asia, which varies from $0.17 to $0.37 per cubic
meter of water storage, is relatively low compared to many countries in Africa
(Lee and Vissher, 1990).

Compared to deep and shallow tube-wells, rainwater collection systems are

more cost effective, especially if the initial investment does not include the cost
of roofing materials. The initial per unit cost of rainwater storage tanks (jars) in
Northeast Thailand is estimated to be about $1/l, and each tank can last for
more than ten years. The reported operation and maintenance costs are
negligible.

The feasibility of rainwater harvesting in a particular locality is highly

dependent upon the amount and intensity of rainfall. Other variables, such as
catchment area and type of catchment surface, usually can be adjusted
according to household needs. As rainfall is usually unevenly distributed
throughout the year, rainwater collection methods can serve as only
supplementary sources of household water. The viability of rainwater
harvesting systems is also a function of: the quantity and quality of water
available from other sources; household size and per capita water
requirements; and budget available. The decision maker has to balance the
total cost of the project against the available budget, including the economic
benefit of conserving water supplied from other sources. Likewise, the cost of
physical and environmental degradation associated with the development of
available alternative sources should also be calculated and added to the
economic analysis.

Assuming that rainwater harvesting has been determined to be feasible, two

kinds of techniques - statistical and graphical methods - have been developed
to aid in determining the size of the storage tanks. These methods are
applicable for rooftop catchment systems only, and detail guidelines for design
of these storage tanks can be found in Gould (1991) and Pacey and Cullis (1986,
1989).

Accounts of serious illness linked to rainwater supplies are few, suggesting

that rainwater harvesting technologies are effective sources of water supply for
many household purposes. It would appear that the potential for slight
contamination of roof runoff from occasional bird droppings does not
represent a major health risk; nevertheless, placing taps at least 10 cm above
the base of the rainwater storage tanks allows any debris entering the tank to
settle on the bottom, where it will not affect the quality of the stored water,
provided it remains undisturbed. Ideally, storage tanks should cleaned
annually, and sieves should fitted to the gutters and down-pipes to further
minimize particulate contamination. A coarse sieve should be fitted in the
gutter where the down-pipe is located. Such sieves are available made of
plastic coated steel-wire or plastic, and may be wedged on top and/or inside
gutter and near the down-pipe. It is also possible to fit a fine sieve within the
down-pipe itself, but this must be removable for cleaning. A fine filter should
also be fitted over the outlet of the down-pipe as the coarser sieves situated
higher in the system may pass small particulates such as leaf fragments, etc. A
simple and very inexpensive method is to use a small, fabric sack, which may
be secured over the feed-pipe where it enters the storage tank.

If rainwater is used to supply household appliances such as the washing

machine, even the tiniest particles of dirt may cause damage to the machine
and the washing. To minimize the occurrence of such damage, it is advisable to
install a fine filter of a type which is used in drinking water systems in the
supply line upstream of the appliances. For use in wash basins or bath tubs, it
is advisable to sterilise the water using a chlorine dosage pump.

Rainwater harvesting appears to be one of the most promising alternatives for

supplying freshwater in the face of increasing water scarcity and escalating
demand. The pressures on rural water supplies, greater environmental impacts
associated with new projects, and increased opposition from NGOs to the
development of new surface water sources, as well as deteriorating water
quality in surface reservoirs already constructed, constrain the ability of
communities to meet the demand for freshwater from traditional sources, and
present an opportunity for augmentation of water supplies using this
technology.
 RAIN WATER HARVESTING AND ARTIFICIAL RECHARGE
TO GROUND WATER

WHAT IS RAIN WATER HARVESTING :

The principle of collecting and using precipitation from a catchments surface.

An old technology is gaining popularity in a new way. Rain water harvesting is

enjoying a renaissance of sorts in the world, but it traces its history to biblical
times. Extensive rain water harvesting apparatus existed 4000 years ago in the
Palestine and Greece. In ancient Rome, residences were built with individual
cisterns and paved courtyards to capture rain water to augment water from city's
aqueducts. As early as the third millennium BC, farming communities in
Baluchistan and Kutch impounded rain water and used it for irrigation dams.

ARTIFICAL RECHARGE TO GROUND WATER :

Artificial recharge to ground water is a process by which the ground water

reservoir is augmented at a rate exceeding that obtaining under natural conditions
or replenishment. Any man-made scheme or facility that adds water to an aquifer
may be considered to be an artificial recharge system.

WHY RAIN WATER HARVESTING :

Rain water harvesting is essential because :-

Surface water is inadequate to meet our demand and we have to depend on

ground water.

Due to rapid urbanization, infiltration of rain water into the sub-soil has decreased
drastically and recharging of ground water has diminished.

As you read this guide, seriously consider conserving water by harvesting and
managing this natural resource by artificially recharging the system. The examples
covering several dozen installations successfully operating in India constructed
and maintained by CGWB, provide an excellent snapshot of current systems.

RAIN WATER HARVESTING TECHNIQUES :

There are two main techniques of rain water harvestings.

Storage of Rain Water on Surface for Future Use.

Recharge to ground water.

The storage of rain water on surface is a traditional techniques and structures used
were underground tanks, ponds, check dams, weirs etc. Recharge to ground water
is a new concept of rain water harvesting and the structures generally used are :-

Pits :- Recharge pits are constructed for recharging the shallow aquifer. These are
constructed 1 to 2 m, wide and to 3 m. deep which are back filled with boulders,
gravels, coarse sand.

Trenches:- These are constructed when the permeable stream is available at

shallow depth. Trench may be 0.5 to 1 m. wide, 1 to 1.5m. deep and 10 to 20 m.
long depending up availability of water. These are back filled with filter. material.

Dug Wells:- Existing dug wells may be utilised as recharge structure and water
should pass through filter media before putting into dug well.

Hand Pumps:- The existing hand pumps may be used for recharging the
shallow/deep aquifers, if the availability of water is limited. Water should pass
through filter media before diverting it into hand pumps.

Recharge Wells:- Recharge wells of 100 to 300 mm. diameter are generally
constructed for recharging the deeper aquifers and water is passed through filter
media to avoid choking of recharge wells.

Recharge Shafts:- For recharging the shallow aquifer which are located below
clayey surface, recharge shafts of 0.5 to 3 m. diameter and 10 to 15 m. deep are
constructed and back filled with boulders, gravels & coarse sand.

Lateral Shafts With Bore Wells:- For recharging the upper as well as deeper
aquifers lateral shafts of 1.5 to 2 m. wide & 10 to 30 m. long depending upon
availability of water with one or two bore wells are constructed. The lateral shafts
is back filled with boulders, gravels & coarse sand.

Spreading Techniques:- When permeable strata starts from top then this
technique is used. Spread the water in streams/Nalas by making check dams, nala
bunds, cement plugs, gabion structures or a percolation pond may be constructed.

DIVERSION OF RUN OFF INTO EXISTING SURFACE WATER BODIES

Construction activity in and around the city is resulting in the drying up of water
bodies and reclamation of these tanks for conversion into plots for houses.

Free flow of storm run off into these tanks and water bodies must be ensured. The
storm run off may be diverted into the nearest tanks or depression, which will
create additional recharge.

Urbanisation Effects on Groundwater Hydrology :

Increase in water demand

More dependence on ground water use

Over exploitation of ground water

Increase in run-off, decline in well yields and fall in water levels

Reduction in open soil surface area

Reduction in infiltration and deterioration in water quality

Methods of artificial recharge in urban areas :

Water spreading

Recharge through pits, trenches, wells, shafts

Rooftop collection of rainwater

Roadtop collection of rainwater

Induced recharge from surface water bodies.

Computation of artificial recharge from Rooftop rainwater collection

Factors taken for computation:

Roof top area 100 sq.m. for individual house and 500 sq.m. for multi-storied
building.

Average annual monsoon rainfall - 780 mm.

Effective annual rainfall contributing to recharge 70% - 550 mm.

 Individual Multi-Storeyed
Houses Building

Roof top area 100 sq. m. 500 sq. m.

Total quantity available for recharge per 55 cu. m 275 cu. m.

Water available for 5 member Family 100 days 500 days

 Benefits of Artificial Recharge in Urban Areas :

Improvement in infiltration and reduction in run-off.

Improvement in groundwater levels and yields.
Reduces strain on Special Village Panchayats/ Municipal / Municipal
Corporation water supply
Improvement in groundwater quality
Estimated quantity of additional recharge from 100 sq. m. roof top area is 55.000
liters.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
 HARVESTING RAINWATER HARNESSING LIFE :

A NOBLE GOAL - A COMMON RESPONSIBILITY

Ground water exploitation is inevitable is Urban areas. But the groundwater

potential is getting reduced due to urbanisation resulting in over exploitation.
Hence, a strategy to implement the groundwater recharge, in a major way need to
be launched with concerted efforts by various Governmental and Non-
Governmental Agencies and Public at large to build up the water table and make
the groundwater resource, a reliable and sustainable source for supplementing
water supply needs of the urban dwellers.

Recharge of groundwater through storm run off and roof top water collection,
diversion and collection of run off into dry tanks, play grounds, parks and other
vacant places are to be implemented by Special Village Panchayats/
Municipalities /Municipal Corporations and other Government Establishments
with special efforts.

The Special Village Panchayats/Municipalities/Municipal Corporations will help

the citizens and builders to adopt suitable recharge method in one's own house or
building through demonstration and offering subsidies for materials and
incentives, if possible.

ATTRIBUTES OF GROUNDWATER :

There is more ground water than surface water

Ground water is less expensive and economic resource.
Ground water is sustainable and reliable source of water supply.
Ground water is relatively less vulnerable to pollution
Ground water is usually of high bacteriological purity.
Ground water is free of pathogenic organisms.
Ground water needs little treatment before use.
 Ground water has no turbidity and colour.
Ground water has distinct health advantage as art alternative for lower sanitary
quality surface water.
Ground water is usually universally available.
Ground water resource can be instantly developed and used.
There is no conveyance losses in ground water based supplies.
Ground water has low vulnerability to drought.
Ground water is key to life in arid and semi-arid regions.
Ground water is source of dry weather flow in rivers and streams.
 

Radial Collector Wells / Ranney Wells

The radial collector well or popularly known as ranney wells basically consists of
4 or 5m internal dia R.C.C well resembling a foundation well of a bridge pier with
a series of slotted steel pipes, generally 200mm to 300mm dia installed radically at
the lower periphery of the well to facilitate flow of water in the well sump. Such a
well is sunk into the bed of the river having an aquifer preferably of sand and
gravel usually not less than 7m above top of radial pipe. Water is lifted with the
help of pumps installed at the top.
The well is lowered to a depth pre-determined by test bores in order to derive the
maximum depth of water from the aquifer. Usually the saturated aquifer should
not be less than 7m, above the top of radial pipes and possible taken to
impermeable strata i.e clay or rock. The well is then plugged at the bottom, the
thickness of concrete being about 2.5m. The water in the well is pumped out dry
and workmen are permitted to descend into the well for drilling the holes of 200 to
300mm dia and going upto 30-35m in length in ten or more directions in the
concrete wall of the well. Through these holes, slotted pipes are pushed
horizontally with the help of 50 tonne twin jacks into the surrounding aquifer.
Each such pipe is 30m or more in length. The length of the pipe is governed by the
composition and capacity of water bearing strata. The total length of the pipes
would thus be about 350m or more per well. The slotted pipes are made up of
short lengths of 2.4m each and are welded to each other electrically one after the
other.
A very vital operation while driving the slotted pipes if the de-sanding of these
tubes which are to remain inside the sand bed being driven to certain length. In
these tubes an inner tube is inserted for the purpose of pushing a burst of
compress air in order to loose and separate the fine particles of the strata at the
head of the pipes. When the pushing of compressed air is stopped, due to the head
of water table, pressure of water carries the fine particles into the well, which are
further carried until clear water starts coming. By this process, a big sheath
consisting of coarser particles in the strata is formed around the pipes. During the
process, careful measurement of the quantity of sand removed would give an idea
of the sheath formed around the pipes. The entrance velocity of ground water
generally is 5m/sec removing about 0.3 to 0.6m3 of the soil material per running
metre pipe before the wash water gets cleared.
The water from the sandy river bed enters the pipes through tapered slots 3 to
6mm wide depending upon the fineness of sand. Collected water is then pumped
out or well. The slots are tapered with wider face towards inside of the well and
this arrangement facilitates removal of sand, if any, from the well. Had the slots
been not taped or provided in the wrong direction, sand grains would get locked
in the slots through arch action and the flow of water would be substantially
reduced.
The best condition for these wells are that the aquifer should be of coarse sand of
depth greater than 12m, as already stated and depth of water in hot weather in the
aquifer should be about 10m. These conditions are not met with, as in Delhi and
most of the upper India, the method is still successful and economical but the
quantity of water would be about 4 to t mgd dependent upon the depth of water
fineness of sand.
The general arrangement of a typical radial collector wells is enclosed for
reference.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Maximum Capacity of Conduits for the Drawing-in of P.V.C

Insulated Cables (Un-sheathed)

Aluminium Nominal
Conductor Sectional Area
Cable No and of Conductors
Nominal Dia.
Of wires In mm
in mm 19 mm 25 mm 32 Mm 38 mm 51 mm 64 mm
In sqm s B s b s b s b s b s
 1/1.40 1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
1/1.80 2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
1/2.24 4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
1/ 2.80 6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
1/3.55 10 2 - 4 2 6 5 8 6 - - - -
7/1.70 16 - - 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8
7/2.24 25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
17/2.50 35 - - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6
7/3.00 50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5
19/1.80
Note:
1. The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a
simultaneous drawing in of cables. The table applies to 250v grade
VI;R/P.V.C Aluminium conductor cables.
2. The columns head ‘S’ applies to runs of conduit which have distance not
exceeding 4.25 met between drawn boxes and which do not deflect from the
straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. The columns headed ‘B’ apply
to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight an angle of more than 15
degrees (Reproduced from general specification for Electrical Works 1972 of
C.P.W.D)

CONVERSION POWERT TABLE

On horse-power in terms of Per Hour Per min. Per sec.
Water cub. Feet x feet fall 31.731 528.8000 8.8130
Fluid gallons flow x lb. per sq. in 85,800 1.4300 23.6300
pressure
Fluid cub. feet flow x lb. per sq. in 13752 229¼.0000 3.8200
pressure
Fluid cub. Feet flow x inches water 0.38x106 6.3460 105¾.000
gauge
Lb ‘F’ heat units (each 778 ft-lb) 2545 42.2400 0.7070
Lb. F hat units (each 1400 ft-lb) 1415 23.6000 0.3930
Kilogram ‘C’ heat units (Metric.p.) 632.65 10.5400 0.1757
Stem lb. evaporated from and at 2120F 2.63 0.0438 0.73,106
Fuel burnt lb. at 14,000 heat units per lb. 0.1818 303,103 50.5,106
Fuel burnt 12,725 heat units per lb. 0.2 2.3,10 36,106
Fuel burnt at 19,500 heat units per lb. 0.18 2.16+103 36,106
Lighting gas burnt cub.ft at 500 heat 5 1/12 1/720
units per cub.ft
Producer gas burnt cub.fee4t at 127 heat 22.5 3/8 1/100
units per cub.feet
Joule S = Watt S = 107 Ergs. 2.68x106 44.760 .160
.0746
¾ Kilowatt-
sec
Kilogram metres 273.753 4562.38 76.0398
1 H.P.hr = 27342.9 Kg-m = 0.7456 k.w–hr
= 641.6 Kg. cal

CONVERSION FACTORS
TEMPERATURE
Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees
Kelvin Centigrade Fahrenheit Rankine
. 0K 0
C 0
F 0
K
TO KELVIN T 0+273.15 5/9 5/9 r
(t-459.67)
OOCENTIGRADE T-27315 0 5/9 (t-32) 5/9 (r - 491.67)
TOFAHRENHEIT 5/9 T-459.67 5/9 +32 T r - 459.67
RORANKINE 5/ T 0+491.67 T +459.67

RELATIVE LUMINANCE OF LIGHT SOURCE

Object
cd/cms
Sun 1,65,000
Moon 0.25
Filament of incandescent lamp gas-filled 700-120
Incandescent lamp –froasted 5-15
Incandescent tube – vacuum type 200
Fluroscent tube-white and daylight 0.5-0.8
Ceiling over indirect lighting fixture .003-0.03
Mercury-are quartz tube 100-150
Neon tube (red) .1
White paper (reflection factor 80% , illumination 400 lux) .001
Grey paper (reflection factor 40%, illumination 400 lux) .0005
Black paper (reflection factor 4% illumination 400 lux) .00005

CONVERSION FACTORS FOR ILLUMINATION UNITS

Units 1m/ft2 Lux Foot-Candle

One im/ft2 1 10.75 0
One Lux 0.093 1 0.093
One foot Candle 1 10.76 1

CONVERSION FACTORS FOR BRIGHTNESS UNITS

Units Cd/in2 Cd/cm20 Cm/ft2 lamberts Foot-lamberts

One candles 1 0.156 144 0.487 452.40
Per sq.in
Per sq.cm 6.45 1 929 3.142 2919
Per sq.ft 0.007 0.001 1 3.0034 3.14
One lambert
(one lumen/-q.cm) 2.054 0.318 295.7 1 929
One foot-lambert 0.002 0.0003 .318 .001 1
(One lumen/sq.ft)

NON METALLIC CONDUIT WIRING

Materials
Conduits
(i) All non-metallic conduit pipes and accessories shall be of material
complying with IS: 2509-1973 and IS 3419-1989 for rigid conduits shall be
free from obstructions. The Rigid conduit pipes shall be ISI marked.
(ii) The conduits shall be circular in cross section. This conduits shall be
designated by their Nominal Outside diameter. The dimensional details of
rigid non-metallic conduits are given in Table iii
(iii) Non –metallic conduit less than 20mm in diameter shall not be used.
(iv) Wiring Capacity: The maximum number of PVC insulated aluminium
LIMT/ copper conductor cables of 650/1100V grade conforming to IS: 694-
10 that can be drawn in on conduit of various sizes will remain the same as
for metallic wiring system.

Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100V grade aluminium/copper

conductor cable conforming to IS: 694-1990

Nominal 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

Cross-
Sectional
Conductor in
sq.mm
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
S B S B S B S B S B S B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 .. .. .. .. .. ..
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 .. .. .. .. .. ..
6 2 .. 5 4 6 7 .. .. .. .. .. ..
10 2 .. 4 3 3 5 8 8 .. .. .. ..
16 .. .. 2 2 3 3 6 6 10 7 12 8
25 .. .. .. .. .. 2 5 5 8 6 9 7
35 .. .. .. .. .. .. 3 3 6 5 8 6
50 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5 3 6 5
70 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4 3 5 4
Note:
1. The above table show the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing in o cables
2. The columns headed ‘S’ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between
draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. The
columns headed ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more
than 15 degrees.
3. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.

Aluminium Copper Bus Bar Sections

Current Ratings Recommended rectangular cross-section

in amps. Upto Aluminium Copper
No of Size in No. of Size in
Strips/Phase mm. Strips/Phase mm.
100 1 20 x 5 1 20 x 3
200 1 30 x 5 1 25 x 5
300 1 50 x 5 1 40 x 5
400 1 50 x 6 1 50 x 5
500 1 75 x 6 1 60 x 5
600 1 80 x 6 ... ...
800 1 100 x 6 ... ...
1000 1 100 x 10 ... ...
1200 1 125 x 10 ... ...
1600 2 100 x 10 ... ...
2000 2 125 x 10 ... ...
2500 3 125 x 10 ... ...
Note:
1. In larger bus bars of sizes above 100 amps. The sections can be accepted in
other rectangular cross-sections and numbers also, provided the total cross-
sectional area shown in the above table against the respective busbar rating.
2. With aluminium busbars, only aluminium witre/solid bar connections
shall be made for incoming/outgoing mountings on the switchboard.
3. With copper busbars. Only copper wire/solid bar Connections shall be
made for incoming/outgoing mountings on the switch boards.

EARTHING
SELECTION OF TYPE OF EARTH ELECTRODES
Following are general guidelines for the selection of the type of electrodes

Type of electrode Application

GI Pipe Internal electrical installations, With incoming switch gear
upto 200A
GI Plate (i) For internal electrical installations with incoming switch
gear larger
than 200A
(ii) Neutral earthing of transformers, generating Sets upto
500KVA
 (iii) Lightening conductors
Copper Plate Neutral earthing of transformers/Generating Sets above
500KVA
Strip Conductor Locations where it is not possible to use other pipes.
NUMBER OF EARTH ELECTRODES
(i) In all cases, relevant provisions of Rules 33,61 and 67 of the India
Electricity Rules 1856 as amended shall be complied with.
(ii) Non-current carrying metal parts of all apparatus utilizing power supply at
voltage exceeding 250 volts shall be earthed by two separate and distinct
set.

METERIALS AND SIZES OF EARTH ELECTRODES

Types of Electrode Material
Pipe GI Medium Class 40mm dia 4.5 m long
(without any joint)
Plate (i) G.I 60 cm x 60 cm x 6 mm
(ii) Copper 60 cm x 60 cm x 3 mm
Strip (i) GI 100 sq.mm section
(ii) Copper 40sq.mm section
Conductor (i) GI 5 mm dia (6 SWG)
(ii) Copper 4 mm dia (8 SWG)
NOTE : Galvanisation of GI item conform to class iv of IS 436-1986
 TABLE IV : EARTH CONTINUITY STRIP FOR PROTECTIVE
EARTHING OF SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT
S. (i) (2) (3)
No Type of installation Earth Electrode Earth strip from earth electrode
to earth bus and loop earthing
of equipment
1 Indoor substation with HT panel, transformer, Copper Plate 25 x 5 mm
capacity upto 1600 KVA, LT panel Generating Set Copper strip
2 Indoor substation with HT panel, transformer, Copper Plate 32 x 5 mm
capacity above 1600 KVA, LT panel Generating Copper strip
Set
3 HT panel, transformer Copper Plate 25 x 5 mm
Copper strip
4 LT indoor substation with generator Copper Plate 25 x 5 mm
Copper strip
5 LT switch room having incomer switch capacity G.I. Pipe 6 SWG G.I. Size
up to 200 Amp
6 LT switch room having incomer switch capacity G.I. Pipe 25 x 5 mm
above 200 Amp G.I Strip

TABLE V : EARTH CONTINUITY STRIP FOR BUS TRUNKING AND RISING MAIN

S. (i) (2) (3)

No Type of installation Material of main Earth strip
conductor
1* Bus trunking upto 2500 Amp capacity Copper/ 2 Nos 25x5 mm copper strip
Aluminium
2* Bus trunking above 2500 Amp capacity 2 Nos 32x5 mm copper strip
3 Bus trunking for connecting generating set an LT 2 Nos 25x5 mm copper strip
Panel
4** Rising main upto 400 Amp capacity 2 Nos 20x3 mm copper strip
2 No 20x5 mm aluminium strip
2 Nos 25x45 mm GI strip
5 Rising main above 400 Amp an upto 800 Amp 2 Nos 25x5 mm copper strip
capacity 2 Nos 25x6 mm aluminium
strip

* Since bustrunking will be required to connect transformer to LT panel boards in indoor substation where
protective earthing and earth bus shall be of copper, it is proposed to provide copper earth continuity strip only.
Provided Al/GI strip will ultimately necessitated connection with copper earth bus which should be
** In case the size of the main conductor is limited up to 35 sq.mm the size of the earth conductor shall be
determined as per details at para 3 b(1) and (ii)
 TABLE VI : NEUTRAL EARTHING OF TRANSFORMER AND GENERATORS
S. (i) (2) (3)
No Equipment Earth Electrode Earth strip from earth station to
(2 Nos) neutral
1 Transformer of capacity upto 1600 KVA Copper Plate 25 mm x 5 mm copper strip
2 Transformer of capacity above 1600 KVA Copper Plate 32 mm x 5 mm copper strip
3 Generators of all capacity Copper Plate 25 mm x 5 mm copper strip

AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION

VENTILATION:
Ventilation implies fresh air supply, the removal of contaminants and heat for
cooling and freshening. The basic requirement in ventilation is to
counteract the discomfort due to humidity. The table given below is a guide
to the number of air changes generally required in ventilation for different
buildings.
Situations : Air changes
Assembly Halls/Hospital (General Ward) 8-12 Per hour
Laboratories office
Bank 4-8 Per hour
Boiler House/Foundaries 40-60 Per hour
Centeen/Rastaurants/Factories/Workshop 12-20 Per hour
Dark Rooms/Kitchen Domestic 20-30 Per hour
The Procedure of estimating the rate of ventilation is to calculate the total interior
space by the number air changes per minute of the respective space calculate the
total interior space by the number air changes per minute of the respective space
calculated from the table. This gives the rate of air movements required in cubic
foot per minute.
i.e. length of the room x width x air changes per hour
60
= Air movement per minute in cfm.
PERFORMACE OF EXHAUST FANS SUITABLE FOR USE ON 220/240 VOLTS
SINGLE PHASE 50 C/S/A/C SUPPLY.
Fan dia lnmm in inches Fan Speed Capacity Input walts Fan sound
rpm cfm db
 12 305 1400 100 80 56
900 1300 90 52
15 380
1400 2000 150 62
18 457 900 2300 150 56
1400 3600 370 66
24 610
700 4250 240 57
36 915 940 5500 500 63
570 11000 740 62
720 14400 1400 67

AIR CONDITIONING
THICKNESS OF SHEET FOR RECTANGULAR AIR DUCTS
Thickness of sheet
Maximum size G.I Sheet Aluminium Sheet
Up to 300 0.63 mm 0.80 mm
31 to 750 0.80 mm 0.80 mm
76 to 150 0.80 mm 1.00 mm
151 to 2250 1.00 mm 1.50 mm
226 and above 1.25 mm 1.80 mm

THICKNESS OF SHEET FOR ROUND AIR DUCTS

Thickness of sheet
Diameter of Duct cm G.I Sheet Aluminium Sheet
mm. mm.
15 to 50 0.63 0.63
51 to 75 0.80 0.80
76 to 100 0.80 1.00
101 to 125 1.00 1.50
Above 125 1.25 1.80

AIR CONDITIONING DUCTS

Specification
(a) Up to 30” (75 cm) use 24 gauge, G.I sheet with 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
Angle iron frame with 6mm bolts at 12cm distance.
(b) 31” to 60” (78 cm to 150 cm) use 22 gauge, G.I sheet with 35mm x 35mm
x 3mm
Angle iron frame cross bracing or necessary 35mm x 35mm x 3mm
(c) 61” to 90” (151 cm to 225 cm) use 20 gauge, G.I sheet with 35mm x 35mm
x 4mm or 5mm Angle iron frame with 10mm bolts to be braced with 35mm
x 35mm x 3mm angle if longer than 1.25 metres.

RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM DUCT VELOCITIES

IN METRES PER MINUTE
Application Supply Trunk Ducts small risers Return
And large risers and Branches Mains
Residences 240 180 180
Apartments and 450 330 300
hotel bedrooms
Theatres 480 360 360
Private Offices- - 330 240
delux - 390 300
Private Offices-
average 660 420 360
General Offices 540 420 360
Restaurants - 450 360
Shop-Small 540 420 360
Department Stores

Recommended Dimensions of Passenger Lifts

All dimensions in millimeters
Load Car Inside Lift Well Entrance
Persons Kg A B C D E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
4 272 1100 700 1900 1300 700 (Min)
6 408 1100 1000 1900 1700 700 (Min)
8 544 1300 1100 1900 1900 800
10 680 1300 1350 2100 2100 800
13 884 2000 1100 1900 1900 900
16 1088 2000 1300 2100 2100 1000
20 1360 2000 1500 2400 2400 1000

Recommended Dimensions of Goods Lifts

Load Car Inside Lift Well Entrance
Kg A B C D E
500 1100 1200 1900 1500 1100
1000 1400 1800 2300 2100 1400
1500 1700 2000 2600 2300 1700
2000 1700 2500 2600 2800 1700
2500 2000 2500 2900 2800 2000
3000 2000 3000 2900 3300 2000
4000 2500 3000 3400 3300 2500
5000 2500 3600 3400 3900 2500

Recommended Dimensions of Hospital Lifts

 Load Car Inside Lift Well Entrance
Persons Kg A B C D E
15 1020 1000 2400 1800 3000 800
20 1360 1300 2400 2200 3000 1200
26 1768 1600 2400 2400 3000 1200

Note:-
1. The total headroom has been calculated on basis of car height of 2.2m.
2. In the case of manually operated doors, clear entrance will be reduced by
the amount of projection of handle on the landing door
3. Although 15 persons capacity lift in not standard one, this is included to
cover lifts of smaller capacity which can be used in small hospital
4. All dimensions given above are recommended dimensions primarily for
architects and building planner Any variation mutually agreed between
manufacturer and purchaser are permitted. However variation in car inside
dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in IS 14665
(Part 3/Sec 1)
FIRE PROTECTION
Class of Fire

Class A :Fires involving paper, Wood, Textile,

Packing, materials and the like
Class B :Fires involving Oil, Petrol, Solvent, Grease,
Paints, Celluloid and the like
Class C :Fires involving Electrical Hazards, Motor
Vehicle Gaseous substance under pressure
Class D :Fires involving Chemicals, Metal, and
active like
Class E :Fires involving Electrical equipment,
Delicate machinery and the like

Mode of Fire Protection

1. Sand/Water buckets
2. Dry/Wet Hydrant risers
3. Heat/Smoke Detectors
4. Automatic/Mannual Fire Alarm
5. Sprinklers
7. Fire Dampers in AC Ducts
8. Fire Doors with fusable link
9. Pressurisation Plant
10. Public Address System
11. Fire Escapes/External stairs
6. Lightning Conductors

Coverage (Floor) Area

1. Water/Sand 100s.q.Mt 4. Sprinklers 6s.q.Mt
Bucket
2. Extinguishers 600s.q.Mt 5. Heat Detectors 16s.q.Mt
(9Lts)
3 Hydrant Riser 6. Smoke Detectors 50s.q.Mt
(Outlet 100 mm (For a ceiling
Dia With landing height of 4 Mts and
valve and First aid clean environment)
Hose Reel) 930s.q.Mt

Coverage of Extinguishers
Type of Extinguishers Suitable for Class of Fire

1. Soda Acid Type Class – A

2. Foam Type Class – B
3. Dry Chemical Power Type Class - B,C,D & E
4. Carbon-di-oxide Type Class - B,C & E
5. Water Carbon-di-oxide Type Class – A
6. Carbon-Tetra- Chloride Type Class - C

Water Requirement for the Fire-Fighting

Q = 3000P Q = Fire demand in Liters/ Minute

P = Population in Thousands

Note: The above rate must be maintained at a minimum pressure of 1 to

1.5 kg/ cm2 for atleast four Hours.
 SIZES OF CAPACITORS IN KVAR
Required for given degree of Power Factor Corredtion, Per KW Load
INITIAL CORRECTIONS TO
POWER FACTOR 0.85 0.90 0.95 0.98 UNITY
0.50 1.115 0.248 1.403 1.529 1.732
0.51 1.066 0.202 1.357 1.483 1.686
0.52 1.024 0.60 1.315 1.441 1.644
0.53 0.980 0.116 1.271 1.397 1.600
0.54 0.939 0.075 1.230 1.356 1.559
0.55 0.899 0.035 1.190 1.316 1.519
0.56 0.860 0.996 1.151 1.277 1.480
0.57 0.822 0.958 1.117 1.239 1.442
0.58 0.785 0.921 1.076 1.202 1.405
0.59 0.748 0.884 1.039 1.165 1.368
0.60 0.714 0.849 1.005 1.131 1.334
0.61 0.679 0.815 0.970 1.096 1.299
0.62 0.645 0.781 0.936 1.062 1.265
0.63 0.613 0.749 0.904 1.030 1.265
0.64 0.580 0.716 0.871 0.997 1.265
0.65 0.549 0.685 0.840 0.966 1.265
0.66 0.518 0.654 0.809 0.935 1.265
0.67 0.488 0.624 0.779 0.905 1.265
0.68 0.459 0.595 0.750 0.875 1.265
0.69 0.429 0.565 0.720 0.840 1.265
0.70 0.400 0.536 0.691 0.811 1.265
0.71 0.372 0.508 0.663 0.783 1.265
0.72 0.343 0.479 0.634 0.754 1.265
0.73 0.315 0.452 0.607 0.727 1.265
0.74 0.289 0.425 0.650 0.700 1.265
0.75 0.262 0.398 0.553 0.673 1.265
0.76 0.235 0.371 0.526 0.634 1.265
0.77 0.269 0.345 0.500 0.607 1.265
0.78 0.183 0.319 0.473 0.650 1.265
0.79 0.156 0.292 0.447 0.553 1.265
0.80 0.130 0.266 0.421 0.526 1.265
0.81 0.104 0.240 0.395 0.500 1.265
0.82 0.078 0.214 0.369 0.473 1.265
0.83 0.052 0.188 0.343 1.447 1.265
0.84 0.026 0.162 0.317 1.421 1.265
0.85 - 0.136 0.291 1.395 1.265
0.86 - 0.109 0.264 1.369 1.265
0.87 - 0.083 0.238 1.343 1.265
0.88 - 0.054 0.209 1.317 1.265
0.89 - 0.028 0.183 1.291 1.265
0.90 - - 0.155 1.264 1.265
0.91 - - 0.124 1.238 1.265
0.92 - - 0.097 1.209 1.265
0.93 - - 0.066 1.183 1.265
0.94 - - 0.034 1.155 1.265
0.95 - - - 0.124 1.265
0.96 - - - - 1.265
0.97 - - - 1.062 1.265
0.98 - - - 1.062 1.265
0.99 - - - 1.062 1.265

CLASSES OF INSULATION
(For Motors)

Type Max operating Temp. Materials used

Y 90oC
A 105oC
E 120oC
B 130oC
F 155oC
H 180oC
C above 180oC
Insulation and Overload Capacity of Machines
Cotton, Silk, Paper and similar
organic material and combination of
such materials which are not
impregnated nor immersed in oil.
Above materials impregnated with
Varnish or enamel or oil immersed.
Comprises inorganic materials such
as mica, glass
Fibre a bestors or combination of
these materials in built up form with
binding cement.
Class B materials when built up with
suitable Cement or binder.
Combination of materials such as
consists of materials or mica, glass
fiber and silicon elastomer with
suitable binding impregnating or
coating substances as silicon resins.
Materials such as mica, porcelain,
glass quartz and asbestos with or
without an inorganic binder
 Permissible observable Temperature-rise
Class of Temp. Rise(oC) measured Average Temp. Rise(oC) Calculated
Insulation by thermometer from increase of winding resistance
Y 35 45
A 55 60
E 65 70
B 75 80
F 95 105
H 115 125